Canon C3200 Printer User Manual

Color imageRUNNER
C3200
Sending Guide
Manuals for the Machine
The manuals for this machine are divided as follows. Please refer to them for detailed information.
The manuals supplied with optional equipment are included in the list below. Depending on the system
configuration and product purchased, some manuals may not be needed.
Guides with this symbol are printed manuals.
• Basic Operations
• Troubleshooting
• Copying Instructions
• Mail Box Instructions
• Sending Instructions
• Fax Instructions
• Setting Up the Network Connection and
Installing the CD-ROM Software
• Remote User Interface Instructions
• Network Connectivity and Setup Instructions
• Color Network ScanGear Installation and
Instructions
• PS/PCL/UFR Printer Instructions
• PCL Printer Driver Installation and
Instructions
• PS Printer Driver Installation and
Instructions
• UFR Printer Driver Installation and
Instructions
CD-ROM
Guides with this symbol are PDF manuals included on the
accompanying CD-ROM.
Reference Guide
Copying Guide
Mail Box Guide
Sending Guide
(This Document)
Facsimile Guide
Network Quick Start Guide
Remote UI Guide
CD-ROM
Network Guide
CD-ROM
Color Network ScanGear
User's Guide
CD-ROM
PS/PCL/UFR Printer Guide
CD-ROM
PCL Driver Guide
CD-ROM
PS Driver Guide
CD-ROM
UFR Driver Guide
CD-ROM
• Fax Driver Installation and Instructions
The machine illustration on the cover may differ slightly from your machine.
Fax Driver Guide
CD-ROM
How This Manual Is Organized
Chapter 1
Introduction to Sending Functions
Chapter 2
Basic Sending Methods
Chapter 3
Basic Scanning Features
Chapter 4
Special Scanning Features
Chapter 5
Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Receiving Documents
Chapter 7
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
Chapter 8
Customizing Communications Settings
Chapter 9
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
Chapter 10 System Manager Settings
Chapter 11 Printing Communication Reports
Chapter 12 Troubleshooting
Chapter 13 Appendix
Includes the report samples, glossary, and index.
Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, as we are constantly improving our
products, if you need an exact specification, please contact Canon.
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Symbols Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Keys Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Displays Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xii
Illustrations Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Abbreviations Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Legal Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Chapter 1
Introduction to Sending Functions
What This Machine Can Do. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Overview of the Color imageRUNNER C3200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Setting the Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
Setting the Current Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
Registering Sender Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Registering the Unit's Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Flow of Sending Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Placing Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-35
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-36
Platen Glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37
Feeder (DADF-K1) (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40
Canceling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42
Using the Touch Panel Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42
Using the Stop Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43
Using the System Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44
Chapter 2
Basic Sending Methods
Specifying Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Using the Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Using the New Address Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Specifying an E-Mail Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Specifying an I-Fax Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
v
Specifying a File Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying a User Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the One-Touch Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Favorites Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
2-32
2-34
2-36
2-38
Checking/Changing a Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Erasing a Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Chapter 3
Basic Scanning Features
Selecting a Scan Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Two-Sided Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Document Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Specifying the Document Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Registering the Specified Document Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Manual Exposure Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Original Type Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Automatic Exposure Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Changing Color Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Grayscale) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Black-and-White) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Full Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grayscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Black-and-White . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 4
3-24
3-24
3-26
3-28
3-30
3-31
Special Scanning Features
Two-Page Separation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Original Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Book Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Binding Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Different Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Job Build. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Image Quality Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Remove Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Prevent Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
User Preset Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Storing Scan Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Naming a User Preset Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
vi
Erasing Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
Chapter 5
Sending Documents
Sending Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Sending an E-Mail Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Sending an I-Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Sending a Job to a File Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Sending a Job to a User Inbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Delaying a Send Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Previewing Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Job Done Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Job Recall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Chapter 6
Receiving Documents
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Receiving Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Setting the Memory Lock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Memory RX Inbox Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Setting the Memory RX Inbox Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Storing Received I-Fax Documents in Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Memory Lock Start Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
Memory Lock End Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Forwarding Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Erasing Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
Available Paper Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-23
Chapter 7
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Checking Send Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Changing the Destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Resending a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
Printing the Send Job Status/Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Checking/Changing the Status of Receive Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Checking Receive Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Printing the Receive Job Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Checking the Arrival of an I-Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
Checking the Status of Jobs That Have Been Forwarded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22
Chapter 8
Customizing Communications Settings
Communications Settings Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Automatic Document Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
vii
JPEG Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Handling Documents That Fail to Be Forwarded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Number of Retry Attempts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Standard Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Favorites Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registering a Favorites Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naming a Favorites Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Erasing a Favorites Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-15
8-15
8-18
8-20
PDF Compression Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Initial Send Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Printing the TX Terminal ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Gamma Value for Color Send Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Initializing TX Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Two-Sided Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Paper Drawer Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Reducing a Received Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Printing Footer Information on a Received Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
2 On 1 Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Chapter 9
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
Address Book Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
About the Address Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Storing New Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
E-Mail Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
I-Fax Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
File Server Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Group Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Address Obtained via a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Editing Address Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Erasing Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Naming an Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60
Erasing One-Touch Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-87
Chapter 10 System Manager Settings
System Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Communications Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
E-Mail/I-Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Memory RX Inbox Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Setting the Memory RX Inbox Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
viii
Storing Received I-Fax Documents in Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13
Memory Lock Start Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-14
Memory Lock End Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18
Manage/Access to Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-22
Address Book Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-22
Access Number Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-24
Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-26
Storing Forwarding Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-26
When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the Forwarding
Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-49
Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-60
Forwarding Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-62
Erasing Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-63
Printing Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-64
LDAP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-66
Registering an LDAP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-66
Changing an LDAP Server Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-80
Deleting an LDAP Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-82
Printing LDAP Server Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-83
Chapter 11 Printing Communication Reports
Report Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2
Specifying Report Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3
Send TX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3
Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5
Printing Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-9
Address Book List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-9
User's Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11
Chapter 12 Troubleshooting
When Problems Occur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-2
Sending Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-2
Receiving Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5
Other Situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-7
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-8
Self-Diagnostic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-8
List of Error Codes without Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-12
Questions & Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-25
Chapter 13 Appendix
Report and List Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-2
Send Job List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-2
ix
Send TX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Forwarding Conditions List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Registered LDAP Server List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Address Book List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
User's Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
x
Preface
Thank you for purchasing the Canon Color imageRUNNER C3200. Please read this manual
thoroughly before operating the machine in order to familiarize yourself with its capabilities,
and to make the most of its many functions. After reading this manual, store it in a safe place
for future reference.
How To Use This Manual
Symbols Used in This Manual
The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions,
handling precautions, and instructions that should be observed for safety.
WARNING
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or
injury to persons if not performed correctly. In order to use the machine
safely, always pay attention to these warnings.
CAUTION
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to
persons, or damage to property if not performed correctly. In order to
use the machine safely, always pay attention to these cautions.
IMPORTANT
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read
these items carefully in order to operate the machine correctly, and to
avoid damage to the machine.
NOTE
Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional
explanations for a procedure. Reading these notes is highly
recommended.
Keys Used in This Manual
The following symbols and key names are a few examples of how keys to be
pressed are expressed in this manual:
• Touch
Panel Display Keys: [Key Name]
Examples:
• Control
[Cancel]
[Done]
Panel Keys: <Key icon> + (Key Name)
Examples:
(Start)
(Stop)
xi
Displays Used in This Manual
Screen shots of the touch panel display used in this manual are those taken when
the Color imageRUNNER C3200 has the following optional equipment attached to
it: the Feeder (DADF-K1), Color Universal Send Kit, Resolution Switching Board,
Color Network Multi-PDL Printer Kit, Saddle Finisher-N2, and Cassette Feeding
Unit-X1.
Note that functions that cannot be used depending on the model or options, are not
displayed on the touch panel display.
The keys which you should press are marked with
, as shown below.
When multiple keys can be pressed on the touch panel display, all keys are marked.
Select the keys which suit your needs.
Press [Address Book/Server].
Press this key for operation.
xii
Illustrations Used in This Manual
Illustrations used in this manual are those displayed when the Color
imageRUNNER C3200 has the following optional equipment attached to it: the
Feeder (DADF-K1), and Cassette Feeding Unit-X1.
Abbreviations Used in This Manual
In this manual, product names and model names are abbreviated as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 95 operating system:
Windows 95
Microsoft® Windows® 98 operating system:
Windows 98
Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition operating system:
Windows Me
Microsoft® Windows NT® operating system:
Windows NT
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 operating system:
Windows 2000
Microsoft® Windows® XP operating system:
Windows XP
Microsoft® Windows® operating system:
Windows
Novell NetWare®:
NetWare
xiii
Legal Notices
Trademarks
Canon, the Canon logo, and imageRUNNER are trademarks of Canon Inc.
Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Mac OS is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
IBM and OS/2 are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
NetWare® and Novell are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. in the United States
and other countries.
NDS is a trademark of Novell, Inc.
Sun and Solaris are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and
other countries.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed
exclusively X/Open Company Limited.
Bitstream Inc. licenses the following fonts:
Dutch 801 Bold, Dutch 801 Bold Italic, Dutch 801 Italic, Dutch 801 Roman, Swiss
721 Bold, Swiss 721 Bold Oblique, Swiss 721 Oblique, Symbol.
Other product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their
respective owners.
xiv
Copyright
Copyright 2003 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, or by any
information storage or retrieval system without the prior written permission of
Canon Inc.
Disclaimers
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS
MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO
MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE OF USE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT. CANON
INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES
RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
xv
xvi
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
CHAPTER
This chapter is an introduction to the Send function.
What This Machine Can Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Overview of the Color imageRUNNER C3200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Setting the Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
Setting the Current Date and Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
Registering Sender Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Registering the Unit's Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Flow of Sending Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Placing Originals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-36
Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37
Feeder (DADF-K1) (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40
Canceling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Using the Touch Panel Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42
Using the Stop Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43
Using the System Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44
1-1
What This Machine Can Do
The Color imageRUNNER C3200 is packed with various send functions.
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
Diverse Sending Methods
You can easily scan paper documents and
send them to one or multiple recipients
through e-mail or I-fax, bringing to your
work environment increased efficiency in
the arena of document exchange. The
ability to send documents to FTP, SMB,
and NetWare file servers also serves to
help digitize paper documents for
convenient data access and management.
Sending documents through fax is available
only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is
installed.
Fax
Inbox
E-mail
File Server
I-Fax
File Formats for Every Need
You can send documents in a variety of file
formats, including TIFF, MTIFF, JPEG, and
PDF. The document's color mode and the
file's compression ratio can also be set.
This gives you the freedom to send
documents in a manner that is best suited
to the purpose of the document, as well as
the recipient's document handling
environment.
1-2
What This Machine Can Do
Original
TIFF
PDF
MTIFF
JPEG
Flexible Scan Features
Originals
Send
1
Introduction to Sending Functions
This machine offers a variety of convenient
scanning features, such as the scanning of
two-sided and book originals, as well as
the ability to merge and send documents
that are scanned separately. You can also
set the exposure, color mode, and
document size to match the type of original
that you are scanning. In addition, you can
store preferred scan settings and retrieve
them at any time.
Preview Function
The Preview function enables you to check
the contents of documents before sending
them. This is useful in preventing mistakes.
Original
Preview
Instant Address Search with LDAP
You can search for addresses stored on
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol) servers on the network and use
them as recipients for send jobs or store
them in the Address Book.
LDAP Server
john@canon.com
bob@canon.com
What This Machine Can Do
1-3
Receiving I-Faxes in Memory
Received I-fax documents can be stored in
the Memory RX Inbox instead of being
printed out. You can check the sender
information and the number of pages that
each document contains before printing it
or forwarding it to another destination.
1
Introduction to Sending Functions
Receiving faxes in memory is available only if
the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
Memory
RX Inbox Memory
Lock
Print
Send
I-Fax Reception
Automatic Forwarding
The machine can be set to automatically
forward received I-fax documents that
match the specified forwarding conditions
to any destination using the desired send
settings. You can forward I-fax documents
to other machines (relay function) or store
received documents that are confidential in
Confidential Fax Inboxes. The forwarding
function can be set to activate during any
specified time. Since received documents
that do not match the forwarding conditions
can also be forwarded to any desired
destination, this function can be used to
sort and deliver received I-fax documents
to the appropriate destinations.
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed,
the machine can also receive faxes and forward
both received fax and I-fax documents to fax
machines.
1-4
What This Machine Can Do
Forward
Confidential
Fax Inbox
Overview of the Color imageRUNNER C3200
Original
Inbox
Scan
I-Fax
E-mail
File Server
Fax *1
Group
E-mail
I-Fax
*1 If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, faxing is possible. You can also register the fax numbers in group
addresses.
Overview of the Color imageRUNNER C3200
1-5
1
Introduction to Sending Functions
If you press [Send], the Send Basic Features screen appears. The Send function
enables you to scan documents, and send them to specified destinations via e-mail
or I-fax, save them to a file server, or store them in an inbox in order to process
them at a later date. You can also send documents to multiple destinations
simultaneously using various sending methods, such as e-mail and I-fax.
IMPORTANT
• You can use the sending functions of the Color imageRUNNER C3200 only if the optional
Color Image Reader-C1 is attached. If the optional Color Image Reader-C1 is not
attached, you cannot use any sending function, and therefore, this guide is not
necessary.
• Network settings have to be specified in order to be able to send scanned documents to
an e-mail address, an I-fax address, or a file server. (See the Network Guide.)
1
Send Basic Features Screen
Introduction to Sending Functions
The screen on the left, which appears when [Send] is
selected, is called the Send Basic Features screen.
Displays the current scan settings.
Destination List
Displays a list of destinations.
➞ See p. 3-2
Press to select the scan mode. (See "Selecting a Scan Mode," on p. 3-2.)
➞ See p. 2-2
Press to select a destination from the Address Book. (See "Using the Address Book," on
p. 2-2.)
➞ See p. 2-49
Press to check or change the destination
information selected from the destination
list. (See "Checking/Changing a
Destination," on p. 2-49.)
➞ See p. 2-52
Press to erase the destination displayed in the destination list. (See "Erasing a
Destination," on p. 2-52.)
1-6
Overview of the Color imageRUNNER C3200
➞ See p. 5-41
Press to recall previously set send jobs including the destinations, scan settings, and
send settings. (See "Job Recall," on p. 5-41.)
1
Introduction to Sending Functions
➞ See p. 3-5
Press to scan both sides of the original. (See "Two-Sided Originals," on p. 3-5.)
Press to select the file format of the document you are going to send (TIFF/JPEG,
MTIFF/PDF, PDF/PDF, or PDF (Compct)).
➞ See p. 5-34
Press to verify the images before sending. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
➞ See p. 5-37
Press to notify the user through e-mail that the send job has been completed. (See "Job
Done Notice," on p. 5-37.)
➞ See p. 5-2
Press to set the send settings. You can specify various settings here, such as setting for
the document to be sent at a specified time, or entering a subject for an e-mail or an I-fax.
(See "Sending Methods," on p. 5-2.)
➞ See p. 2-36
Press to recall the destinations and settings stored in a favorites button. (See "Using the
Favorites Buttons," on p. 2-36.)
Overview of the Color imageRUNNER C3200
1-7
➞ See p. 2-34
Press to recall the destinations stored in a one-touch button. (See "Using the One-Touch
Buttons," on p. 2-34.)
➞ See p. 2-2
1
Introduction to Sending Functions
Press to specify addresses not stored in the Address Book. (See "Using the New
Address Tab," on p. 2-5.)
Scan Settings Screen
The screen on the left, which appears when you select
[Option] from the Scan Settings drop-down list, is
called the Scan Settings screen.
Display this screen to set the scan settings for sending
documents.
➞ See p. 3-24
Press to select the Color mode for scanning. (See "Changing Color Modes," on p. 3-24.)
➞ See p. 3-15
Press to select the resolution. (See "Resolution," on p. 3-15.)
➞ See p. 3-7
Press to select the size of the original that you want to scan. (See "Document Size," on
p. 3-7.)
➞ See p. 3-2
Press to select a stored scan mode and resolution. (See "Selecting a Scan Mode," on
p. 3-2.)
1-8
Overview of the Color imageRUNNER C3200
➞ See p. 4-34
Press to store or erase a scan mode. (See "User Preset Keys," on p. 4-34.)
➞ See p. 3-17
➞ See p. 3-17
Press to select the type of original (Text /Photo, Photo, or Text) that you are going to scan.
(See "Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings," on p. 3-17.)
➞ Chapter 4
Press to use the special features available
for scanning.
➞ Chapter 7
Press to check the status or details of a send or receive job, or to cancel a job.
Overview of the Color imageRUNNER C3200
1-9
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
Press [ ] or [ ] to manually control the scan exposure. Press [A] to select or cancel the
automatic exposure control. (See "Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings," on
p. 3-17.)
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
This section describes the important setting registrations and procedures that must
be done before the machine is used for sending operations.
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
IMPORTANT
• If you attempt to use the machine without registering the necessary information correctly,
the machine may not function properly.
• Network settings have to be specified in order to send scanned documents to an e-mail
address, an I-fax address, or a file server. (See the Network Guide.)
NOTE
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, you must set the type of telephone line
connected to the machine. For more information on selecting the telephone line type, see
Chapter 1, "Introduction to Fax Functions," in the Facsimile Guide.
■ Registering the Sending Record
The sending record is printed at the top of the recording paper when you send an I-fax.
The following sender information must be printed on every I-fax transmission:
• Your machine's I-fax address
• The name of your company and department
• Date and time of transmission
Date
Time
05/18/2003 15:00
I-Fax Address
IFAX john@canon.co.jp
• Date and Time
- The date and time of the transmission.
• I-Fax Address
- Your machine's I-fax address.
1-10
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
Destination Name
Atlanta office
Page Number
001/001
Sender information
• Destination Name
- If you send an original and select a destination from the Address Book, the stored
destination's name appears on the sending record. (See "Storing New Addresses," on
p. 9-5.)
• Page Number
- The current page number out of the total number of pages of the original is recorded.
Setting the Display Language
If you decide to switch the display language, set the Language Switch setting to
'On' before inputting characters.
If the Language Switch setting is set to 'Off', and then you set it to 'On' after
inputting characters, the characters may not be displayed correctly. If this happens,
either reenter the characters after setting the Language Switch setting to 'On', or
enter characters with the Language Switch setting set to 'Off'.
Setting the Current Date and Time
You can set the current date and time. The current date and time settings are used
as standard timer settings for functions that require them.
• GMT:
• Time
Zone:
• Daylight
Saving Time:
The time at the Greenwich Observatory in England is
called GMT (Greenwich Mean Time).
The standard time zones of the world are expressed
globally in terms of the difference in hours (± up to 12
hours) from GMT (± 0 hours). A time zone is a region
throughout which this time difference is the same.
In some countries, time is advanced throughout the
summer season. The period in which this is applied is
called "Daylight Saving Time."
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
1-11
1
Introduction to Sending Functions
NOTE
• You can set the machine so that the sending record is not printed. However, for users in
the United States, this information must be printed at the top of every fax or I-fax that you
send. Therefore, the TX Terminal ID setting must always be turned 'On'. (See "Printing
the TX Terminal ID," on p. 8-28.)
• If the machine is set so that the sending record is printed at the top of the recording
paper, and not all of the items are registered, only the required registered items and the
total number of original pages are printed.
1
Press
2
Press [Date & Time Settings].
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Timer Settings].
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
1-12
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
3
Enter the current date (month, day, year) and time using
(numeric keys).
Enter the month and the day using four digits.
Enter all four digits of the year, and the time in 24-hour notation as four digits
without a space.
Examples:
May 6 ➞ 0506
7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering values, press
again, starting with the month.
(Clear) ➞ enter the values
● If you are setting the Time Zone:
❑ Press the Time Zone drop-down list ➞ select the time zone where the machine
is located.
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
1-13
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
NOTE
• The default setting is 'GMT-5:00'.
• Eastern Time (US/Canada):
GMT-5:00
• Central Time (US/Canada):
GMT-6:00
• Mountain Time (US/Canada): GMT-7:00
• Pacific Time (US/Canada):
GMT-8:00
• If the desired time zone is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll through the list.
1
Introduction to Sending Functions
● If you are setting Daylight Saving Time:
❑ Press [On] ➞ [Start Date].
❑ Select the month and day from the Month and Day drop-down lists,
respectively.
❑ Press [-] or [+] to enter the time of day you want Daylight Saving Time to take
effect ➞ press [OK].
1-14
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
❑ Press [End Date] ➞ make the settings in the same way as [Start Date] ➞
press [OK].
NOTE
• If you set Daylight Saving Time, the machine automatically sets the standard time
of the machine one hour forward at the specified date and time.
• The default setting is 'Off'.
• You can also use
(numeric keys) to enter the time, and
(Clear) to clear
your entry.
• You can change the value under <Hours> by pressing [-] or [+], even if you have
entered the value using
(numeric keys).
• The time can be set in one hour increments, from 0 to 23 hours.
4
Press [OK].
The selected mode is set.
5
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
1-15
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
Registering Sender Names
You can register any name as the sender's name, such as the section or
department's name, or an individual's name.
If each user registers their personal name as a sender name, they can select their
sender name to replace the unit's name which is printed at the top of the
documents that they send.
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
NOTE
• You can set to display and print the sender's name instead of the name stored as the
unit's name with the Sender's Names setting from the Send Settings screen. (See
"Sending an E-Mail Message," on p. 5-2, and "Sending an I-Fax," on p. 5-14.)
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, the sender name can be printed in the TX
Terminal ID.
1
1-16
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications
Settings].
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
2
Press [TX Settings] under <Common Settings>.
3
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
Press [Sender's Names (TTI)].
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
1-17
4
Select the number under which you want to register the
sender's name ➞ press [Register/Edit].
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
You can store up to 99 sender names (01 to 99).
If the desired number is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲].
You can also enter and specify the number under which you want to register the
sender's name using
(numeric keys).
To delete a stored sender's name, select the number under which the name is
registered ➞ press [Erase]. Only one sender name can be erased at a time.
5
Enter the sender's name ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 24 characters for the sender's name.
To cancel registering the sender's name, press [Cancel].
The selected mode is set.
1-18
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
NOTE
• For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• To delete all of the entered characters, press
(Clear).
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Registering the Unit's Name
Your name or company's name must be registered as the unit's name (a
department name is optional).
For example:
• Your
name:
John Smith
• Company name:
Canon
• Company name and department: Canon-Accounting Dept.
When you send a document, the recipient's machine displays or prints your name
or company's name (and department's name, if applicable) as the sender's
information on the recording paper.
NOTE
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, the sender name can be printed in the TX
Terminal ID.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications
Settings] ➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Registering Sender
Names," on p. 1-16.
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
1-19
1
Introduction to Sending Functions
6
2
Press [Unit Name].
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
3
Enter a name ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 24 characters for the unit's name.
To cancel registering the unit's name, press [Cancel].
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
• For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• To delete all of the entered characters, press
(Clear).
1-20
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
1
Introduction to Sending Functions
4
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
1-21
Flow of Sending Operations
This section describes the flow of basic sending operations.
1
Introduction to Sending Functions
NOTE
• Before using the Send function, it is useful to read the following topics:
- Main power and control panel power (See Chapter 1, "Before You Start Using This
Machine," in the Reference Guide.)
- Routine maintenance (See Chapter 7, "Routine Maintenance," in the Reference
Guide.)
• The maximum number of send jobs that the machine can hold is 120 (including jobs with
error codes). However, the actual number of send jobs that the machine can handle may
be less than 120, depending on the following conditions:
- Multiple documents are being sent at the same time
- Large documents are being sent
• You can print a report that contains the results of all send jobs. (See "Send TX Report,"
on p. 11-3.)
1
Press the appropriate keys in accordance with the messages
displayed on the touch panel display.
If there are no messages displayed, proceed to step 2.
● If the message <You must insert a control card.> appears:
❑ Insert a control card into the optional Card Reader-D1.
The Basic Features screen is displayed.
1-22
Flow of Sending Operations
NOTE
For instructions on using the optional Card Reader-D1, see Chapter 3, "Optional
Equipment," in the Reference Guide.
● If the message <Enter the Department ID and Password using the
numeric keys.> appears:
❑ Press [Dept. ID] ➞ enter the Department ID using
❑ Press
-
(numeric keys).
(numeric keys).
(ID).
The Basic Features screen is displayed.
NOTE
For instructions on using Department ID Management, see Chapter 6, "System
Manager Settings," in the Reference Guide.
2
1
Introduction to Sending Functions
❑ Press [Password] ➞ enter the password using
-
Press [Send].
The Send Basic Features Screen
Flow of Sending Operations
1-23
3
Place your originals.
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
NOTE
For instructions on placing your originals, see "Placing Originals," on p. 1-35.
4
Specify the destinations.
NOTE
• A maximum of 256 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 256
destinations, 64 new addresses, including those obtained through a server, can be
specified.) If you specify a group address, which is made up of several
destinations, the whole group is counted as one address.
• The icons that are displayed on the screen are:
: Group
: E-mail
: I-Fax
: File Server
: Inbox
: Fax (if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed)
1-24
Flow of Sending Operations
● If a destination is stored in the Address Book:
❑ Press [Address Book/Server] ➞ select the desired destination. (See "Using the
Address Book," on p. 2-2.)
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
● If a destination is not stored in the Address Book:
❑ Press [New Address] ➞ select a sending method ➞ select the desired
destination. (See "Using the New Address Tab," on p. 2-5.)
NOTE
A maximum of 64 new addresses and addresses obtained through a server (User
Inboxes are not included in this count) can be specified at the same time.
Flow of Sending Operations
1-25
● If a destination is stored in a One-Touch Button:
❑ Press [One-touch Buttons] ➞ select the one-touch button that contains the
desired destination. (See "Using the One-Touch Buttons," on p. 2-34.)
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
● If a destination is stored in a Favorites Button:
❑ Press [Favorites Buttons] ➞ select the favorites button that contains the
desired destination. (See "Using the Favorites Buttons," on p. 2-36.)
1-26
Flow of Sending Operations
● If you want to specify a destination using a server:
❑ Press [Address Book/Server] ➞ search through the directory listing on the
server (LDAP) to specify the destination. (See "Using a Server," on p. 2-38.)
NOTE
A maximum of 64 new addresses and addresses obtained through a server (User
Inboxes are not included in this count) can be specified at the same time.
Flow of Sending Operations
1-27
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
5
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ select a scan
setting.
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
If you do not see the desired scan setting, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll through the
list.
To change the Scan mode settings, select [Option] from the Scan Settings
drop-down list, and adjust the settings. (See "Scan Settings," on p. 3-5.)
NOTE
For instructions on setting the Scan mode, see "Selecting a Scan Mode," on p. 3-2.
1-28
Flow of Sending Operations
Press [Send Settings] ➞ enter the send settings ➞ press
[Done].
1
Introduction to Sending Functions
6
NOTE
For instructions on specifying the Send Settings, see "Sending Methods," on p. 5-2.
Flow of Sending Operations
1-29
7
Press the File Format drop-down list ➞ select a file format.
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
This part of the procedure is not necessary if any one of the following is true:
- An I-fax address is specified as the destination
- A User Inbox is specified as the destination
- A Fax number is specified as the destination (if the optional Super G3 FAX
Board is installed)
File Formats:
[TIFF/JPEG]:
Sends images in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or JPEG
(Grayscale/Color) format.
[MTIFF/PDF]:
Enables you to insert multiple images into a single MTIFF or
PDF file. Sends the file in either the MTIFF (Black) or PDF
(Grayscale/Color) format.
[PDF/PDF]:
Enables you to insert multiple images into a single PDF file.
Sends the file in the PDF format regardless of the color mode.
[PDF (Compct)]: Enables you to send files containing text originals or text/photo
originals using a high compression ratio. You can also send
multiple images together as one PDF file.
The Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Black-and-White) and
Black-and-White color modes cannot be set together.
If you select 'PDF (Compct)' as the file format, it is
recommended that you set the original type setting to either
'Text/Photo' or 'Text', depending on the image type.
1-30
Flow of Sending Operations
8
Press [Job Done Notice] ➞ select the destination to which to
send the notification message ➞ press [OK].
You can set the notification message if necessary.
If you select a destination that is protected by Access Number Management,
press [Access Number] ➞ enter the access number for the selected destination.
(See "Specifying Destinations," on p. 2-2.)
Flow of Sending Operations
1-31
1
Introduction to Sending Functions
NOTE
• For more information on the different file formats, see "File Formats," in the
Glossary on p. 13-12.
• If [PDF (Compct)] is selected as the File Format, set the JPEG Compression Ratio
in TX Settings in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen)
to 'Normal' or 'Low Ratio'. If the Compression Ratio is set to 'High Ratio', the
images output may be of a low quality even if [Image Priority] is selected in Image
Level for PDF (Compct) in TX Settings in Communications Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen). (See "JPEG Compression Ratio for Color Send
Jobs," on p. 8-6.)
NOTE
• To display [Access Number], set the Access Number Management to 'On'. To
access the Access Number Management setting, press
(Additional Functions)
➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Manage/Access to Address Book] ➞ [Access Number
Management]. (See "Manage/Access to Address Book," on p. 10-22.)
• For instructions on setting the Job Done Notice, see "Job Done Notice," on p. 5-37.
1
Introduction to Sending Functions
9
Press
(Start).
If the following screen is displayed, follow the instructions on the touch panel
display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete,
press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
NOTE
If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
1-32
Flow of Sending Operations
10 If you want to cancel sending, press
(Stop).
NOTE
• You can press the
(Stop) button to cancel a send job that is being scanned.
• For instructions on canceling a send job, see "Canceling a Job," on p. 1-42.
• You can also cancel a send job from the System Monitor screen. (See "Using the
System Monitor Screen," on p. 1-44.)
11 When scanning is complete, remove your originals.
12 If the optional Card Reader-D1 is attached, remove the control
card.
NOTE
For instructions on using the optional Card Reader-D1, see Chapter 3, "Optional
Equipment," in the Reference Guide.
Flow of Sending Operations
1-33
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
13 If Department ID Management is set, press
(ID).
NOTE
For instructions on using Department ID Management, see Chapter 6, "System
Manager Settings," in the Reference Guide.
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
1-34
Flow of Sending Operations
Placing Originals
Place your originals on the platen glass or in the feeder, depending on the size and
type of original that you want to scan and send, and the send settings that you have
specified.
NOTE
If the original has too many pages to be placed in the feeder all at once, use the Job Build
mode on the Special Features screen (press [Option] from the Scan Settings drop-down
list). (See "Job Build," on p. 4-19.)
■ Platen Glass
Place the originals on the platen glass when scanning bound originals (such as books
and magazines), originals on heavy or lightweight paper, and transparencies.
■ Feeder
Place the originals in the feeder when you want to scan several originals at the same time,
and press
(Start). The machine automatically feeds the originals onto the platen glass
and scans them. Two-sided originals can also be automatically turned over and scanned
as two-sided documents.
Placing Originals
1-35
1
Introduction to Sending Functions
You can use the Color imageRUNNER C3200 to scan originals only if the optional
Color Image Reader-C1 and Platen Cover Type G are attached, or if the optional
Color Image Reader-C1 and Feeder (DADF-K1) are attached.
Orientation
You can place an original either vertically or horizontally. Always align the top edge
of your original with the back edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in the top left
corner), or the back edge of the feeder.
Platen Glass
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
Place the original
face down.
Place the original
face down.
Vertical Placement
Horizontal Placement
Feeder
Place the original
face up.
Vertical Placement
Place the original
face up.
Horizontal Placement
NOTE
• If the top edge of the original is not aligned with the back edge of the platen glass (by the
arrow in the top left corner), your original may not be scanned correctly, depending on the
scan and send modes that you have set.
• Originals of the following sizes can be placed either vertically or horizontally. However,
the scanning speed for horizontally placed originals is somewhat slower than for
vertically placed originals. Place originals horizontally when scanning with a Preset
Zoom, such as when enlarging an LTR original onto 11" x 17" paper.
- Platen glass: LTR, STMT
- Feeder: LTR
• Horizontally placed LTR and STMT originals are referred to as LTRR and STMTR.
• 11" x 17" and LGL originals must be placed horizontally.
1-36
Placing Originals
Platen Glass
NOTE
The machine automatically detects the size of the following originals: 11" x 17", LGL,
LTR, and LTRR.
1
Lift the feeder/platen cover.
Sensor
IMPORTANT
This machine is equipped with an open/close sensor on the feeder/platen cover
(see circled area in the above illustration). When placing originals on the platen
glass, lift the feeder/platen cover about 11 7/8" (300 mm) so that the sensor
detaches from the feeder/platen cover. If the sensor does not detach from the
feeder/platen cover, the size of the originals may not be detected correctly.
2
Place your originals face down.
Placing Originals
1-37
1
Introduction to Sending Functions
You should use the platen glass when scanning bound originals (such as books
and magazines), originals on heavy or lightweight paper, and transparencies into
memory. You should also place the original on the platen glass when you want to
scan an 11" x 17" original with an image that extends all the way to the edges
without the periphery of the original being cut off. (See "Document Size," on p. 3-7.)
The surface of the original that you want to scan must be placed face down.
Align the top edge of your original with the back edge of the platen glass (by the
arrow in the top left corner).
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
Place books and other bound originals on the platen glass in the same way.
NOTE
When you are enlarging an LTR or STMT original onto 11" x 17" or LGL paper,
place the original horizontally on the platen glass, and align it with the LTRR or
STMTR marks.
3
Gently close the feeder/platen cover.
CAUTION
• Close the feeder/platen cover gently to avoid catching your hands, as this
may result in personal injury.
• Do not press down hard on the feeder/platen cover when using the platen
glass to scan thick books. Doing so may damage the platen glass and
result in personal injury.
1-38
Placing Originals
IMPORTANT
• If you are placing the original on the platen glass, the size of the original is detected
after the feeder/platen cover is closed. Be sure to close the feeder/platen cover
before scanning.
• If the original contains fine text or print, such as a map, the machine may need to
read or scan the document several times. Do not remove the original from the
platen glass until scanning is complete.
1
Introduction to Sending Functions
NOTE
• Remove the original from the platen glass when scanning is complete.
• The size of STMT and STMTR originals cannot be detected. After pressing
(Start), follow the instructions on the screen to specify the original size. You can
also manually select the paper size.
Placing Originals
1-39
Feeder (DADF-K1) (Optional)
You should use the feeder when you want to scan several originals at the same
time. Place the originals in the feeder and press
(Start). The machine
automatically feeds the originals onto the platen glass and scans them into
memory. Two-sided originals can also be automatically turned over and scanned as
two-sided documents.
1
Introduction to Sending Functions
You can place the following originals in the feeder's original supply tray:
14 to 28 lb bond (52 to 105 g/m2)
• Size:
11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, or STMT
• Tray Capacity:
- 11" x 17", LGL: 15 sheets (20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
- LTR or STMT: 30 sheets (20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
• Weight:
IMPORTANT
• Do not place the following types of originals in the feeder:
- Originals with tears or large binding holes
- Severely curled originals or originals with sharp folds
- Clipped or stapled originals
- Carbon backed paper or other originals which might not feed smoothly
- Transparencies and other highly transparent originals
• If the same original is fed through the feeder repeatedly, the original may fold or become
creased, and make feeding impossible. Limit repeated feeding to a maximum of 30 times.
(This number varies, depending on the type and quality of the original.)
• If the feeder rollers are dirty from scanning originals written in pencil, perform the feeder
cleaning procedure. (See Chapter 7, "Routine Maintenance," in the Reference Guide.)
• Always smooth out any folds in your originals before placing them in the feeder.
1
1-40
Adjust the slide guides to fit the size of your originals.
Placing Originals
Neatly place your originals with the side to be scanned face
up in the original supply tray.
Place your originals as far into the feeder as they will go, until the Original Set
indicator is lit.
1
Original Set Indicator
IMPORTANT
• Do not add or remove originals while they are being scanned.
• When scanning is complete, remove the originals from the original output area to
avoid paper jams.
Original Output Area
NOTE
• When you are enlarging LTR originals to 11" x 17" or LGL paper, place your
originals horizontally.
• The scanned originals are output to the original output area in the order they are
fed into the feeder.
• You can place different size originals together in the feeder if you set the Different
Size Originals mode. However, the length (vertical direction) of the different paper
sizes must be the same. For example, 11" x 17" and LTR paper can be placed
together. (See "Different Size Originals," on p. 4-17.)
Placing Originals
1-41
Introduction to Sending Functions
2
Canceling a Job
This section explains how to cancel a send job in several ways.
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
Using the Touch Panel Display
You can cancel a send job by pressing [Cancel], when the job has been scanned
with the optional Color Image Reader-C1 attached.
1
Press [Cancel] on the screen shown below, which appears
while the machine is scanning.
The send job is canceled.
2
1-42
Remove your originals.
Canceling a Job
Using the Stop Key
You can cancel a send job by pressing
(Stop), when the job has been scanned
with the optional Color Image Reader-C1 attached.
1
Press
(Stop) only to cancel a send job that is being scanned.
1
Introduction to Sending Functions
NOTE
You can press
(Stop).
The send job is canceled.
2
Remove your originals.
Canceling a Job
1-43
Using the System Monitor Screen
You can cancel a send job while it is waiting to be processed, or while it is being
sent.
1
Press [System Monitor].
2
Press [Send].
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
1-44
Canceling a Job
3
Press [Status].
4
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
Select the job to be canceled ➞ press [Cancel].
If the job that you want to cancel is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll
through the list.
You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel them all at once. Select and cancel
one job at a time.
If a job is in the process of being sent, it may not be canceled even if you press
[Cancel].
The message <Is it OK to cancel?> appears on the touch panel display.
Canceling a Job
1-45
5
Press [Yes].
Introduction to Sending Functions
1
If you do not want to cancel the send job, press [No].
The message <Canceling...> appears for approximately two seconds on the touch
panel display.
The send job is canceled.
NOTE
The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No Good) on the Log screen.
6
Press [Done].
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
1-46
Canceling a Job
Basic Sending Methods
2
CHAPTER
This chapter describes how to specify, check, change, and erase destinations.
Specifying Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Using the Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Using the New Address Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Using the One-Touch Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Using the Favorites Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Using a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Checking/Changing a Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Erasing a Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
2-1
Specifying Destinations
This section describes how to specify a destination for a send job. You can select a
destination stored in the Address Book or a one-touch button, or specify a new
address altogether. You can also recall the destinations and settings stored in the
favorites buttons to check their contents, edit them, or delete them.
Basic Sending Methods
2
Using the Address Book
You must specify the destination (such as an e-mail address, I-fax address, or file
server address) in order to send documents. If you store addresses in the Address
Book, you can easily select them. Addresses are stored in Address Book Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Storing New Addresses," on p. 9-5.)
NOTE
• A maximum of 256 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 256
destinations, 64 new addresses, including those obtained through a server, can be
specified.) If you specify a group address, which is made up of several destinations, the
whole group is counted as one address.
• Address Books can be saved, imported, and transferred using the Remote User
Interface. (See Chapter 2, "Checking and Managing Functions," and Chapter 3,
"Customizing Settings," in the Remote UI Guide.)
1
2-2
Press [Address Book/Server].
Specifying Destinations
2
Select the desired destination from the Address Book.
● If Access Number Management is set to 'On', and you want to select
a destination that is stored with an access number or in a private
address book:
❑ Press [Access Number].
❑ Enter the access number using
Basic Sending Methods
2
-
(numeric keys) for the private address
book or destination ➞ press [OK].
If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with
the Access Number setting are displayed.
To cancel entering the Access Number, press [Cancel].
Specifying Destinations
2-3
❑ Select the destination ➞ press [OK].
Basic Sending Methods
2
● If Access Number Management is set to 'Off', or the destination is
not stored with an access number or in a private address book:
❑ Select the destination ➞ press [OK].
You can select multiple destinations.
Press the alphabet keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the range of entries. Press the
same key again to return to the full address list.
If the desired destination is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired destination.
You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by pressing
the Type drop-down list.
Press the Address Book/Server drop-down list to display a list of subaddress
books (subaddress books 1 to 10, or one-touch buttons). Subaddress books
categorize the addresses stored in the Address Book.
You can also specify a destination by searching the directory listings on a
network server. (See "Using a Server," on p. 2-38.)
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, you can also specify fax
numbers.
2-4
Specifying Destinations
The selected destination appears on the Send Basic Features screen.
Using the New Address Tab
You must specify the destination (such as an e-mail address, I-fax address, or file
server address) in order to send documents. This section describes the procedure
for specifying a new destination that has not been stored in the Address Book.
NOTE
• If you frequently send documents to the same destinations, store these destinations in
the Address Book beforehand. (See "Storing New Addresses," on p. 9-5.)
• A maximum of 64 new addresses and addresses obtained through a server (User
Inboxes are not included in this count) can be specified at the same time.
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, you can also specify fax numbers.
Specifying Destinations
2-5
2
Basic Sending Methods
NOTE
• To display [Access Number], set Access Number Management to 'On'. To access
the Access Number Management setting, press
(Additional Functions) ➞
[System Settings] ➞ [Manage/Access to Address Book] ➞ [Access Number
Management]. (See "Manage/Access to Address Book," on p. 10-22.)
• To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check
mark.
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination ➞
press [Details].
• If you select only one destination, press
(Start) to send from the Search
Address Book/Server screen.
• You can erase the destinations selected from the Address Book before you scan
the document. (See "Erasing a Destination," on p. 2-52.)
Specifying an E-Mail Address
This mode enables you to specify a new e-mail address. You can enter an e-mail
address directly from the keyboard on the touch panel display.
1
Press [New Address] ➞ [E-mail].
2
Press [E-mail Address].
Basic Sending Methods
2
2-6
Specifying Destinations
3
Enter the e-mail address ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 128 characters for the e-mail address.
You can also use
clear your entry.
-
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to
NOTE
For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
4
Press [OK].
The specified e-mail address appears on the Send Basic Features screen.
IMPORTANT
The e-mail address you just entered is not stored in the Address Book. It is deleted
once the document is sent.
NOTE
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination ➞
press [Details].
• You can edit an e-mail address from the Details screen before you scan your
documents. (See "Checking/Changing a Destination," on p. 2-49.)
• You can erase the specified destination from the destination list before you scan
your documents. (See "Erasing a Destination," on p. 2-52.)
Specifying Destinations
2-7
Basic Sending Methods
2
Specifying an I-Fax Address
This mode enables you to specify a new I-fax address. Regardless of the distance
and area, I-fax helps you to reduce transmission cost by making transactions via
the Internet. You can enter an I-fax address directly from the keyboard on the touch
panel display. You can also specify the scan settings and the settings at the
destination when using I-fax.
IMPORTANT
If the destination is an I-fax address, the original is always scanned and sent in the
Black-and-White mode.
2
Basic Sending Methods
NOTE
• Sending by I-fax has the following limitations.
- Size is fixed to LTR. This is because the sender does not know whether the machine at
the destination can receive sizes other than LTR.
- Resolution is fixed to 200 x 200 dpi. (200 x 100 dpi also can be selected optionally.)
- Images can be sent only in monochrome. They are sent in TIFF-MH format.
• If you send by e-mail, the above-mentioned limitations do not apply. The image is sent as
a file attached to the e-mail.
- Sizes other than LTR can be selected.
- The resolution can be selected.
- Images can be sent in color also. Color images are sent in JPEG or PDF format, and
monochrome images are sent in TIFF-MMR format.
1
2-8
Press [New Address] ➞ [I-Fax].
Specifying Destinations
2
Press the Mode drop-down list ➞ select [Simple] or [Full].
[Simple]:
Sends scanned data as an image via the Internet.
[Full]:
Sends scanned data as an image via the Internet, and enables you to
receive a delivery confirmation message telling you whether your
I-fax was sent successfully.
NOTE
• In order for you to receive a confirmation message telling you the delivery status of
your I-fax document, the recipient's machine must have I-fax capabilities and be
compatible with the Full mode.
• If you send documents using the Full mode to a machine that does not support the
Full mode, delivery confirmation cannot be carried out. When this happens, the job
concerned is not considered as complete even though the actual sending of the
document is successful. Such jobs are displayed as <Waiting for result...> on the
Status screen until the time set for Full Mode TX Timeout in E-mail/I-Fax Settings in
Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) has lapsed. After the timeout, the job is moved to the log, and the result is
shown as <->.
3
Press [I-Fax Address].
Specifying Destinations
2-9
Basic Sending Methods
2
4
Enter the I-Fax address ➞ press [OK].
Basic Sending Methods
2
You can enter up to 128 characters for the I-Fax address.
You can also use
clear your entry.
-
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to
NOTE
• For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• If you do not send documents via a server, and the recipient's IP address is not
registered on a DNS server, use the following format to enter the domain name:
(user)@(the recipient's IP address).
5
2-10
Press [Destination Conditions] to set how the document is
received by the recipient.
Specifying Destinations
Specify the receiving conditions of the destination ➞ press
[OK].
2
Basic Sending Methods
6
The following conditions are always selected:
- Paper Size: A4/LTR
- Compression Method: MH (Modified Huffman)
- Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi and 200 x 200 dpi
The paper sizes LTR, LGL, and STMT are included in [LTR].
IMPORTANT
Set the destination conditions according to the specifications of the recipient's
machine. An error in transmission may occur if you set conditions that the
recipient's machine does not support.
NOTE
Available compression methods are:
- MH (Modified Huffman) - a coding system that horizontally scans and
compresses extended areas of white and black dots.
- MR (Modified Read) - a coding system that horizontally and vertically scans and
compresses white and black areas. Faster than MH.
- MMR (Modified Modified Read) - an adaptation of Modified Read, originally for
use in digital machines. Faster than MR.
Specifying Destinations
2-11
7
Select [On] or [Off] for <Send Via Server>.
Basic Sending Methods
2
[On]:
Sends your I-fax documents via a mail server. This enables you to send
documents to destinations via the Internet in the same way that you send
an e-mail.
[Off]:
Does not send your I-fax documents via a server. You can send large
amounts of image data to a recipient within the same LAN (Local Area
Network) environment without placing a burden on the mail server. This
enables you to send documents quickly and directly to the recipient. To
use this setting, it is necessary to set up an MX (Mail eXchange) record
on the DNS server. Ask your System Manager whether this type of
sending is possible before you set <Send Via Server> to 'Off'.
IMPORTANT
The Send Via Server setting is available only if <Use Send Via Server> is set to
'On' from the E-mail/I-Fax Settings screen. To access this screen, press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Communications Settings] ➞
[Email/I-Fax Settings]. If <Use Send Via Server> is set to 'Off', <Send Via Server>
is grayed out, and I-fax jobs are always sent via the server. (See "E-Mail/I-Fax
Settings," on p. 10-4.)
NOTE
Even if <Send Via Server> is set to 'Off', delivery confirmation of documents sent
using the Full mode is carried out via the server.
2-12
Specifying Destinations
8
Press [OK].
The selected modes are set, and the specified I-fax address appears on the Send
Basic Features screen.
IMPORTANT
The I-fax address you just specified is not stored in the Address Book. It is deleted
once the document is sent.
Specifying a File Server
This section describes the three procedures for specifying a file server on the
network as the destination of a send job. You can use the keyboard, Browse key if
you select Windows (SMB) as the server protocol, or Browse key if you select
NetWare (IPX) as the server protocol.
IMPORTANT
Windows NT/2000/XP restricts the number of users or clients that can be accessed.
Once the limit of users or clients has been reached, it is not possible to send documents
to a file server using Windows NT/2000/XP.
NOTE
• Set the following items when sending to a file server:
- Protocol
- Host Name
- File Path
- User
- Password
• For examples of the settings that are needed to send documents to a file server, see the
Network Guide.
• For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• You can use
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to clear your
entry.
• If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, set the FTP server
address specified in imageWARE Gateway as the destination. By using imageWARE
Document Manager and the send function of the imageRUNNER, you can manage
digitized paper documents and computer data on the network.
Specifying Destinations
2-13
2
Basic Sending Methods
NOTE
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination ➞
press [Details].
• You can edit a destination from the Details screen before you scan your
documents. (See "Checking/Changing a Destination," on p. 2-49.)
• You can erase the specified destination from the destination list before you scan
your documents. (See "Erasing a Destination," on p. 2-52.)
■ Using the Keyboard
You can specify a file server as the destination directly from the keyboard displayed on the
touch panel display. Press [Host Name], [File Path], [User], and [Password] to specify the
file server settings.
■ Using the Browse Key (Windows (SMB))
If you select [Windows (SMB)] as the server protocol, you can specify a file server
connected to a specific network by pressing [Browse] on the File screen.
■ Using the Browse Key (NetWare (IPX))
If you select [NetWare (IPX)] as the server protocol, you can specify a file server
connected to a specific network by pressing [Browse] on the File screen.
Basic Sending Methods
2
■ Using the Keyboard
2-14
1
Press [New Address] ➞ [File].
2
Press the Protocol drop-down list ➞ select the desired server
protocol.
Specifying Destinations
The following server protocols may be used:
[FTP]:
Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a
computer running Sun Solaris 2.6 or later, Mac OS X or later,
Internet Information Server 4.0 under Windows NT Server 4.0,
Internet Information Services 5.0 under Windows 2000 Server,
or Internet Information Services 5.1 under Windows XP
Professional.
[Windows (SMB)]: Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a
computer using Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 95/98/Me/2000/
XP.
3
Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a
computer using Novell NetWare 3.2 or later.
Press [Host Name].
A host name is a name assigned to a host computer that provides services on
the Internet. A specific host name is assigned to each host computer to specify it
on the Internet. In this entry box, enter the name of the file server on the network
as the destination of the send job.
If you select [Windows (SMB)] or [NetWare (IPX)] as the server protocol, you can
specify the file server by pressing [Browse]. For instructions on using the Browse
key, see "Using the Browse Key (Windows (SMB))," on p. 2-21, or "Using the
Browse Key (NetWare (IPX))," on p. 2-26.
Specifying Destinations
2
Basic Sending Methods
[NetWare (IPX)]:
2-15
4
Enter the host name ➞ press [OK].
Basic Sending Methods
2
When FTP is selected as the server protocol, you can also specify a port number
after the host name address by entering a colon (:) and the port number.
Example: 192.168.100.50:21000
When FTP is selected as the server protocol, make sure to enter the same port
number for the Host Name as the one specified for the FTP server to which you
are sending your documents.
You can enter up to 128 characters for the host name.
5
Press [File Path].
A file path is a series of characters that signify the location of the folder. Specify a
folder in the file server as the destination of the send job.
2-16
Specifying Destinations
6
Enter the file path ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 128 characters for the file path.
NOTE
If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the folder
name set in imageWARE Gateway.
7
Press [User].
Specifying Destinations
2-17
Basic Sending Methods
2
8
Enter the user name ➞ press [OK].
Basic Sending Methods
2
You can enter up to 24 characters when FTP or NetWare (IPX) is selected as the
server protocol for the user name.
If 'Windows (SMB)' is selected as the server protocol, enter the required user
name information in the manner shown below:
- To enter the user name only
Example: user_name
Maximum 20 characters
- To enter the user name and the domain name
Example: domain_name\user_name
Domain name: Maximum 15 characters
User name: Maximum 20 characters
- To enter a UPN (User Principal Name)
Example: user_name@domain_name.com
Maximum 128 characters
NOTE
• If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the user
name set in imageWARE Gateway.
• UPN (User Principal Name) can be used only if you are sending to a computer
belonging to a domain operated with Active Directory.
2-18
Specifying Destinations
9
Press [Password].
Basic Sending Methods
2
Setting the password is optional.
10 Enter a password ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 24 characters (14 characters when Windows (SMB) is
selected as the server protocol) for the password.
The password appears as asterisks (*****) on the file settings screen.
NOTE
If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the
password set in imageWARE Gateway.
Specifying Destinations
2-19
11 Confirm your settings ➞ press [OK].
Basic Sending Methods
2
The specified file server address appears on the Send Basic Features screen.
IMPORTANT
The file server that you just specified is not stored in the Address Book. It is deleted
once the document is sent.
NOTE
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination ➞
press [Details].
• You can edit a destination from the Details screen before you scan your
documents. (See "Checking/Changing a Destination," on p. 2-49.)
• You can erase the specified destination from the destination list before you scan
your documents. (See "Erasing a Destination," on p. 2-52.)
2-20
Specifying Destinations
■ Using the Browse Key (Windows (SMB))
1
Press [New Address] ➞ [File].
2
Press the Protocol drop-down list ➞ select [Windows (SMB)].
Specifying Destinations
2-21
Basic Sending Methods
2
3
Press [Browse].
Basic Sending Methods
2
IMPORTANT
After turning the main power ON, you must wait for the time set in Startup Time
Settings to elapse before pressing [Browse]. Network transmission is not possible
until this startup time has elapsed. To access Startup Time Settings, press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Network Settings] ➞ [▼]. (See
Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.)
4
Select the desired workgroup ➞ press [Down].
If the desired workgroup is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
workgroup.
2-22
Specifying Destinations
5
Select the desired file server ➞ press [Down].
To move up one level, press [Up].
If the desired file server is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
file server.
6
If the Enter Network Password screen is displayed, enter your
user name and network password.
❑ Press [User].
Specifying Destinations
2-23
Basic Sending Methods
2
❑ Enter your user name ➞ press [OK].
Basic Sending Methods
2
You can enter up to 128 characters for the user name.
❑ Press [Password] ➞ enter your network password ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 14 characters for the password.
After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks
(*****) on the Enter Network Password screen.
2-24
Specifying Destinations
❑ Confirm your settings ➞ press [OK].
7
Press [Down] ➞ select the folder on the specified server to
which you want to send your documents ➞ press [OK].
To go down one level, press [Down].
To move up one level, press [Up].
If the desired folder is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
folder.
Specifying Destinations
2-25
Basic Sending Methods
2
8
Confirm your settings ➞ press [OK].
Basic Sending Methods
2
The file server destination appears on the Send Basic Features screen.
IMPORTANT
The file server that you just specified is not stored in the Address Book. It is deleted
once the document is sent.
NOTE
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination ➞
press [Details].
• You can edit a destination from the Details screen before you scan your
documents. (See "Checking/Changing a Destination," on p. 2-49.)
• You can erase the specified destination from the destination list before you scan
your documents. (See "Erasing a Destination," on p. 2-52.)
■ Using the Browse Key (NetWare (IPX))
1
2-26
Press [New Address] ➞ [File].
Specifying Destinations
2
Press the Protocol drop-down list ➞ select [NetWare (IPX)].
3
Basic Sending Methods
2
Press [Browse].
IMPORTANT
After turning the main power ON, you must wait for the time set in Startup Time
Settings to elapse before pressing [Browse]. Network transmission is not possible
until this startup time has elapsed. To access Startup Time Settings, press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Network Settings] ➞ [▼]. (See
Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.)
Specifying Destinations
2-27
4
Press the drop-down list ➞ select [NDS] or [Bindery] from the
drop-down list.
Basic Sending Methods
2
[NDS]:
One of the directory services provided by Novell for managing the
information of user and server names. Select [NDS] when you are
using Novell NetWare V.4.x.
[Bindery]: One of the directory services provided by Novell for managing the
information of user and server names. Select [Bindery] when you are
using Novell NetWare V.3.x.
If you select [Bindery], follow the procedure from step 5 in "Using the Browse Key
(Windows (SMB))," on p. 2-21.
If you select [NDS], follow the steps below.
5
Select the desired NDS tree ➞ press [Down].
To move up one level, press [Up].
If the desired NDS tree is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
tree.
2-28
Specifying Destinations
6
Select a folder on the specified server in which you want to
log into ➞ press [Log In].
If you do not want to log into a folder, press [Log In] to log into the Novell server.
To go down one level, press [Down].
To move up one level, press [Up].
If the desired folder is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
folder.
The Enter Network Password screen is displayed.
7
Enter your user name and network password.
❑ Press [User].
Specifying Destinations
2-29
Basic Sending Methods
2
❑ Enter your user name ➞ press [OK].
Basic Sending Methods
2
You can enter up to 24 characters for the user name.
❑ Press [Password] ➞ enter your network password ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 24 characters for the password.
After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks
(*****) on the Enter Network Password screen.
2-30
Specifying Destinations
8
Confirm your settings ➞ press [OK].
9
Press [Down] ➞ select the folder to where you want to send
your file ➞ press [OK].
To move up one level, press [Up].
If the desired folder is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
folder.
Specifying Destinations
2-31
Basic Sending Methods
2
10 Confirm your settings ➞ press [OK].
Basic Sending Methods
2
The file server destination appears on the Send Basic Features screen.
IMPORTANT
The file server that you just specified is not stored in the Address Book. It is deleted
once the document is sent.
NOTE
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination ➞
press [Details].
• You can edit a destination from the Details screen before you scan your
documents. (See "Checking/Changing a Destination," on p. 2-49.)
• You can erase the specified destination from the destination list before you scan
your documents. (See "Erasing a Destination," on p. 2-52.)
Specifying a User Inbox
You can store a scanned document in a User Inbox. User Inboxes selected in the
Send function are the same User Inboxes that you can select using the Mail Box
function. If you include a User Inbox as one of the destinations to which you are
sending your document, the document is stored in the selected User Inbox for later
use. Documents stored in a User Inbox can be printed and sent to other
destinations.
IMPORTANT
• Documents that are scanned using a paper size specified by pressing [Other Size] in
Document Size Select, cannot be stored in a User Inbox.
• Documents stored in a User Inbox are automatically erased after three days. However,
you can change this setting. (See Chapter 6, "Customizing Settings," in the Mail Box
Guide.)
2-32
Specifying Destinations
1
Press [New Address] ➞ [Store In Usr Inbox].
2
Basic Sending Methods
2
Select the desired User Inbox ➞ press [OK].
User Inboxes specified as destinations correspond to the inboxes that appear on
the Inbox Selection screen for the Mail Box function.
If the desired User Inbox is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired User Inbox.
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen, and the selected User
Inbox is displayed in the destination list.
NOTE
• You can erase the specified User Inbox from the destination list before you scan
your documents. (See "Erasing a Destination," on p. 2-52.)
• Only one User Inbox can be specified as the destination at a time.
Specifying Destinations
2-33
Using the One-Touch Buttons
You can specify up to 200 destinations in one-touch buttons.
Follow this procedure to start a transmission and send a document with the press of
a one-touch button.
IMPORTANT
To use this feature, you must register destinations in one-touch buttons by pressing
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞ [One-touch Buttons]. (See "Storing/
Editing One-Touch Buttons," on p. 9-60.)
Basic Sending Methods
2
NOTE
A maximum of 256 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 256
destinations, 64 new addresses, including those obtained through a server, can be
specified.) If you specify a group address, which is made up of several destinations, the
whole group is counted as one address.
1
2-34
Press [One-touch Buttons].
Specifying Destinations
Select the desired One-touch Button.
2
Each one-touch button is assigned a three digit number. If you know the
one-touch button's three digit number, you can press
(One-Touch Button
Number) ➞ enter the number for the desired one-touch button using
(numeric keys).
One-Touch Button
Number
The selected destination appears in the destination list on the Send Basic
Features screen.
NOTE
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination ➞
press [Details].
• You can erase the specified destination from the destination list before you scan
your documents. (See "Erasing a Destination," on p. 2-52.)
• You can select multiple one-touch buttons.
• To cancel the selected one-touch button, press the one-touch button again.
Specifying Destinations
2-35
Basic Sending Methods
2
Using the Favorites Buttons
If you frequently send documents with the same document settings to the same
destination, store these settings in a favorites button. Then, when you need to
specify the destination, all you have to do is select the favorites button containing
your stored document settings and the desired destination, and send your
document.
IMPORTANT
To use this feature, you must first register the desired document settings and destinations
in favorites buttons. (See "Favorites Buttons," on p. 8-15.)
Basic Sending Methods
2
NOTE
A maximum of 256 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 256
destinations, 64 new addresses, including those obtained through a server, can be
specified.) If you specify a group address, which is made up of several destinations, the
whole group is counted as one address.
1
2-36
Press [Favorites Buttons].
Specifying Destinations
Select the desired Favorites Button.
2
The specified destination(s) appear in the destination list on the Send Basic
Features screen, and the stored document settings are recalled.
NOTE
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination ➞
press [Details].
• You can erase the specified destination(s) from the destination list before you scan
your documents. (See "Erasing a Destination," on p. 2-52.)
• You can manually change the recalled settings from the selected favorites button
before you send your documents.
• If you press another favorites button, the settings stored in that button are recalled.
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
• If multiple destinations are stored under the selected favorites button, the
destinations may not be listed in the order in which they were set.
Specifying Destinations
2-37
Basic Sending Methods
2
Using a Server
You can specify a destination by searching the directory listings on the network
using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers. LDAP servers are for
looking up a particular piece of information, such as a user name, e-mail address,
or other contact information.
NOTE
• You may have to set up the LDAP servers beforehand, depending on the network
environment.
• For more information on LDAP servers, see "LDAP Server Settings," on p. 10-66.
• You can send to a maximum of 64 destinations at the same time, including destinations
that are specified through a server.
• Only names and e-mail addresses are displayed as the search results from the LDAP
server. (If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, fax numbers are also displayed.)
• You cannot directly specify a destination that is obtained through a server as a forwarding
destination. To specify the destination as a forwarding destination, you must first store it
in the Address Book. (See "Address Obtained via a Server," on p. 9-34.)
Basic Sending Methods
2
1
2-38
Press [Address Book/Server].
Specifying Destinations
2
Press the Address Book/Server drop-down list ➞ press
[Search on Server].
3
4
Basic Sending Methods
2
Press the Server to Search drop-down list ➞ select the
desired server to search.
Specify the search criteria.
NOTE
• For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• If you want to search for a destination that is registered with an e-mail address and
a fax number, you can search for the e-mail address by entering the fax number as
the search criterion.
Specifying Destinations
2-39
● To use Simple Search:
❑ Press [Name], [E-mail], or [Fax] ➞ enter the name, e-mail address, or fax
number for which to search ➞ press [OK].
Basic Sending Methods
2
You can enter up to 128 characters for the name, e-mail address, or fax
number.
You can also use
clear your entry.
-
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to
The search criteria boxes that are not filled out, are not searched.
To make a more detailed search with multiple search conditions, press
[Detailed Search], and follow the directions below. The search criteria you
entered for Simple Search are continuously used in Detailed Search.
● To use Detailed Search:
❑ Press [Detailed Search].
2-40
Specifying Destinations
❑ Press the search category drop-down list ➞ select the desired search
category.
Search Category
Basic Sending Methods
2
The available search categories are:
[Name]:
Search by name.
[E-mail]:
Search by e-mail address.
[Fax]:
Search by fax number.
[Organization]:
Search by organization name.
[OrgnztionUnit]:
Search by organizational unit (e.g., departments in an
organization).
For example, if you want to enter the location to start searching on the
directory tree of the LDAP Server, and ou=salesdept, o=canon, c=jp is the
distinguished name in the directory, enter the organization/organizationUnit of
the user as follows:
organizationUnit=salesdept
organization=canon
NOTE
• The organization/organizationUnit can be used as search categories only if the
information has been registered on the LDAP server.
• A Detailed Search by organization/organizationUnit may not be performed
depending on whether the attribute types have been registered on the LDAP
server, and the type of application on the server, such as Windows 2000 Server
with Active Directory.
Specifying Destinations
2-41
❑ Press the search condition drop-down list ➞ select the desired search
condition ➞ press [Settings].
Search Condition
Basic Sending Methods
2
You can select from the following search conditions:
[contains]:
The result must contain the entered name, e-mail address,
fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[does not contain]: The result must not contain the entered name, e-mail
address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[equals]:
The result must be exactly the same as the entered name,
e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational
unit.
[differs from]:
The result must be different from the name, e-mail address,
fax number, organization, or organizational unit that you
enter.
[begins with]:
The result must begin with the same first few letters that
you enter for the name, e-mail address, fax number,
organization, or organizational unit.
[ends with]:
The result must end with the same last few letters that you
enter for the name, e-mail address, fax number,
organization, or organizational unit.
❑ Enter the search criteria ➞ press [OK].
2-42
Specifying Destinations
You can enter up to 128 characters for the search criteria.
You can also use
clear your entry.
-
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to
❑ Press [Add].
To continue adding more search criteria, press [or] or [and] ➞ repeat step 4.
[or]:
The machine searches and returns a result for either of the specified
search criteria.
[and]: The machine searches and returns a result for all of the specified
search criteria.
To edit the search criteria, select the search criterion that you want to edit ➞
press [Edit] ➞ [Settings]. To delete search criteria, select the criterion that you
want to erase ➞ press [Erase].
NOTE
• You can specify up to four different search criteria at a time.
• If you specify three or more search criteria, you cannot use both [or] and [and]
together.
• If you press [Simple Search] after specifying search criteria on the Detailed Search
screen, the display changes to the Simple Search screen, and the specified
detailed search criteria are deleted.
Specifying Destinations
2-43
Basic Sending Methods
2
5
Press [Start Searching].
Basic Sending Methods
2
To cancel searching, press [Cancel].
To cancel searching while the machine is searching for your criteria, press
[Cancel]. If the machine finds some results before you press [Cancel], these
search results are displayed.
The search results are displayed.
IMPORTANT
The number of search results displayed will not exceed the maximum limit set in
Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). If
the desired destination is not displayed, either increase the maximum number of
addresses to search, or change the search criteria. (See "LDAP Server Settings,"
on p. 10-66.)
NOTE
If you press [Start Searching] without specifying any search criteria, all the
addresses stored on the LDAP server are displayed.
2-44
Specifying Destinations
● If the screen below is displayed:
❑ Press [User] ➞ enter the user name ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 128 characters for the user name.
The Network Password Entry screen is displayed if either one of the following
is true:
If Login Information in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use', and <Display authentication
dialog when searching> is set to 'On'.
If the user name, password, and domain name specified in Register LDAP
Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are incorrect.
❑ Press [Password] ➞ enter the password ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 24 characters for the password.
NOTE
• For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• You can also use
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to clear
your entries.
• After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks (*****) on
the Enter Network Password screen.
Specifying Destinations
2-45
Basic Sending Methods
2
❑ Verify the settings ➞ press [OK].
Basic Sending Methods
2
The search results are displayed.
IMPORTANT
The number of search results displayed will not exceed the maximum limit set in
Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). If
the desired destination is not displayed, either increase the maximum number of
addresses to search, or change the search criteria. (See "LDAP Server Settings,"
on p. 10-66.)
6
Select the desired destination from the search results➞ press
[OK].
To continue searching, press [Back].
You can specify multiple destinations.
If the desired destination is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired destination.
If you press [Select e-mail for I-Fax], the key is lit showing that this setting is
turned on, and the selected e-mail address can be specified as an I-fax
destination.
2-46
Specifying Destinations
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, you can also display fax numbers
that match the conditions.
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, you can sort and limit the view of
the displayed addresses by using the Type drop-down list.
Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
NOTE
• To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check
mark.
• If you specify an e-mail address as an I-fax destination, the only information that
can be retrieved from the server is the I-fax address. To specify settings to match
the recipient's receiving conditions, press [Details] on the Send screen.
• If you select only one destination, press
(Start) to send from the Search Results
screen.
7
Read the displayed message ➞ press [OK].
The selected destination(s) appear in the destination list on the Send Basic
Features screen.
Specifying Destinations
2-47
Basic Sending Methods
2
NOTE
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination ➞
press [Details].
• You can edit a destination from the Details screen before you scan your
documents. (See "Checking/Changing a Destination," on p. 2-49.)
• You can erase the specified destinations from the destination list before you scan
your documents. (See "Erasing a Destination," on p. 2-52.)
Basic Sending Methods
2
2-48
Specifying Destinations
Checking/Changing a Destination
You can check and change a specified destination before you scan your
documents.
1
Select the destination ➞ press [Details].
If the destination that you want to check or change is not displayed, press [▼] or
[▲] to scroll to the desired destination.
Checking/Changing a Destination
2-49
2
Basic Sending Methods
NOTE
• Only the destinations specified using the New Address tab and destinations obtained
through a server can be changed.
• For instructions on changing the specified destination after you scan your document, see
"Changing the Destination," on p. 7-7.
• You cannot change multiple destinations simultaneously.
2
If necessary, check or change the destination's information.
● If the screen below is displayed:
❑ Check the destination's information ➞ press [Done].
Basic Sending Methods
2
● If the destination has been specified using one of the sending
methods in the New Address tab:
❑ Check or change the destination's information ➞ press [OK].
Change the destination's information in the same way that you specified it.
(See "Using the New Address Tab," on p. 2-5.)
2-50
Checking/Changing a Destination
● If the destination is obtained via a server:
❑ Check or change the destination's information ➞ press [OK].
Change the destination's information in the same way that you specified a
new address. (See "Using a Server," on p. 2-38.)
● If the destination is a group address:
❑ To check the information of destinations registered in the group address, select
one destination at a time ➞ press [Details].
❑ Check the destination's information ➞ press [Done] ➞ [Done].
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
Checking/Changing a Destination
2-51
Basic Sending Methods
2
Erasing a Destination
You can erase a specified destination from the destination list before you scan your
documents.
2
Basic Sending Methods
1
Select the destination to be erased.
If the destination that you want to erase is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to
scroll to the desired destination.
2
Press [Erase].
The selected destination is erased from the destination list.
2-52
Erasing a Destination
Basic Scanning Features
3
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the basic scanning features.
Selecting a Scan Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Two-Sided Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Document Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Changing Color Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Grayscale) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Black-and-White) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Full Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Grayscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Black-and-White . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
3-1
Selecting a Scan Mode
You can set the scan mode that a document is scanned in. The machine has six
preset scan modes: ACS 200 x 200 dpi, ACS 300 x 300 dpi, Black 200 x 200 dpi,
Black 300 x 300 dpi, ACS 600 x 600 dpi, and Black 600 x 600 dpi. ACS stands for
Automatic Color Selection.
Select the desired mode from the preset scan modes or user-defined scan modes
(user preset keys), according to the type of original you are sending.
3
Basic Scanning Features
NOTE
• If you want to use less memory and make the sending time shorter, use a low resolution
mode.
• You can adjust the preset scan modes and create new scan settings. However, since
changed scan settings are not automatically saved, it is useful to register a new scan
setting if you use it frequently. (See "User Preset Keys," on p. 4-34.)
• The default setting is 'ACS 200 x 200' dpi. You can change this setting in Edit Standard
Send Settings, which is accessed by pressing
(Additional Functions) ➞
[Communications Settings] ➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings>. (See "Standard
Send Settings," on p. 8-12.)
• You can change the settings and assigned names for the six preset scan keys, and store
them as user-defined scan modes (user preset keys).
• In addition to the scan mode, you can store addresses and other send settings in the
Favorites Buttons. (See "Favorites Buttons," on p. 8-15.)
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination.
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
3-2
Selecting a Scan Mode
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ select a scan mode.
3
If you do not see the desired scan setting, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll through the
list.
When [PDF (Compct)] is selected as the File Format, if you select a scan mode
that has not been registered for ACS, Full Color, or Grayscale 300 x 300 dpi and
press [OK], a message asking for your confirmation to change the File Format
appears on the screen.
NOTE
• Specifying the scan mode again cancels the scan mode and other scan features
previously set.
• You can also select a scan mode by pressing [Option] of the Scan Settings
drop-down list to display the Scan Settings screen ➞ press the Scanning Mode
drop-down list ➞ select a scan mode.
Selecting a Scan Mode
3-3
Basic Scanning Features
2
3
Press
(Start).
When [PDF (Compct)] is selected as the File Format, if you select a scan mode
that has not been registered for ACS, Full Color, or Grayscale 300 x 300 dpi and
press
(Start), a message asking for your confirmation to change the File
Format or scan settings appears on the screen.
If the originals are placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear
on the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When
scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
3
Basic Scanning Features
NOTE
• You can store the changed settings. (See "User Preset Keys," on p. 4-34.)
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press
[Option] ➞ [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
3-4
Selecting a Scan Mode
Scan Settings
To match the original you are sending, set the document size, resolution, exposure,
and original type.
NOTE
Changed scan settings are not saved. For instructions on saving settings, see "User
Preset Keys," on p. 4-34.
Two-Sided Originals
You can set the machine to automatically turn over two-sided originals placed in the
feeder, so as to scan each side separately.
IMPORTANT
• The Two-sided Original mode is available only if the optional Feeder (DADF-K1) is
attached.
• The Two-sided Original mode cannot be used together with the Document Size Select
(Other Size) or Two-page Separation mode.
• When you are scanning originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as
LTRR, make sure to place them horizontally in the feeder. If these originals are placed
vertically, the back sides of the originals are scanned upside down.
1
Place your originals in the feeder ➞ specify the destination ➞
press [Two-sided Original].
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
Scan Settings
3-5
Basic Scanning Features
3
2
Select the type of original ➞ press [OK].
Basic Scanning Features
3
[Book Type]:
The front and back sides of the original have the same
top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite
top-bottom orientations.
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Send Basic Features
screen.
3
Press
(Start).
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
NOTE
• To cancel this setting, press [Two-sided Original] ➞ [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
3-6
Scan Settings
Document Size
You can specify the document size before scanning originals whose size you need
to manually specify, such as transparencies. Specify the document size as well if
you want to scan an 11" x 17" original with an image that extends all the way to the
edges without the periphery of the original being cut off. You can also store the
specified document size.
NOTE
The default setting is 'Auto'.
Specifying the Document Size
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination.
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
2
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
Scan Settings
3-7
3
Basic Scanning Features
IMPORTANT
• You cannot select [Auto] when scanning the following types of originals. Specify the size
of these documents manually.
- Nonstandard size originals
- Highly transparent originals, such as transparencies
- Originals with an extremely dark background
- Originals smaller than STMT in size
• If the original is placed in the feeder, you cannot scan by selecting [Other Size] in
Document Size Select.
3
Press [Document Size Select].
4
Select the document size.
Basic Scanning Features
3
● If you want to scan a standard document size:
❑ Select the desired document size.
If you want to scan an 11" x 17" original with an image that extends all the way
to the edges without the periphery of the original being cut off, place the
original on the platen glass ➞ press [11"x17"+]. (See "Platen Glass," on
p. 1-37.)
NOTE
To select an A or B series paper size, press [A/B-size].
3-8
Scan Settings
● If you want to scan a nonstandard document size:
❑ Press [Other Size].
Basic Scanning Features
3
❑ Enter the size of the document using the numeric keys on the touch panel
display.
❑ Press [X] (width) ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [Y] (length) ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [OK].
X
Y
Scanning
Area
Scan Settings
3-9
If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to
enter an appropriate value appears on the screen.
The display returns to the Document Size Select screen.
NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering values on the touch panel display, press [C]
➞ enter the correct values.
• To enter values in millimeters, press [mm].
• When entering values in millimeters, you can also use
(numeric keys), and
(Clear) to clear your entries.
• For instructions on entering values in inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in
the Reference Guide.
3
● If you want to scan a registered document size:
Basic Scanning Features
❑ Press [Other Size].
❑ Press [Registered Size 1] or [Registered Size 2] ➞ press [OK].
3-10
Scan Settings
NOTE
• To select a registered size, you need to register the document size beforehand.
(See "Registering the Specified Document Size," on p. 3-12.)
• The registered document size is displayed on top of the key in which it is
registered.
5
Press [Done] ➞ [OK]
Basic Scanning Features
3
The selected size is set, and the display returns to the Send Basic Features
screen.
6
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When scanning
is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
NOTE
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press
[Option] ➞ [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
Scan Settings
3-11
Registering the Specified Document Size
1
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
2
Press [Document Size Select].
Basic Scanning Features
3
3-12
Scan Settings
3
Press [Other Size].
4
Basic Scanning Features
3
Press [Register Size].
Scan Settings
3-13
5
Press [Registered Size 1] or [Registered Size 2] ➞ enter the
document size using the numeric keys on the touch panel
display.
❑ Press [X] (width) ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [Y] (length) ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [OK].
Basic Scanning Features
3
If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to
enter an appropriate value appears on the screen.
The selected size is set, and the display returns to the Other Size screen.
The registered document size is displayed on top of the key in which it is
registered.
NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering values on the touch panel display, press [C]
➞ enter the correct values.
• If you register a new document size into a key that has already been registered with
a document size, the new document size overwrites the registered document size.
• To enter values in millimeters, press [mm].
• When entering values in millimeters, you can also use
(numeric keys), and
(Clear) to clear your entries.
• For instructions on entering values in inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in
the Reference Guide.
6
Press [Cancel] ➞ [Done] ➞ [Cancel].
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
3-14
Scan Settings
NOTE
Pressing [Cancel] ➞ [Done] ➞ [Cancel] only stores the new document sizes in the
selected key ([Registered Size 1] or [Registered Size 2]), but does not activate
them. If you press [OK] ➞ [Done] ➞ [OK], the new document sizes are stored in the
selected key ([Registered Size 1] or [Registered Size 2]), and activated at the same
time.
Resolution
You can specify the resolution before scanning the original.
NOTE
The default setting is '200 x 200' dpi.
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination.
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
2
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
Scan Settings
3-15
3
Basic Scanning Features
IMPORTANT
• The maximum size of an image that you can send at 600 x 600 dpi resolution is 11" x 17".
If the image exceeds this number of pixels in either the horizontal or vertical direction, it
may be cropped.
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, and you are sending documents by fax,
the maximum size of an image that you can send at 400 x 400 dpi resolution is 11" x 17".
If the image exceeds this number of pixels in either the horizontal or vertical direction, it
may be cropped.
3
Press the Resolution drop-down list ➞ select a resolution ➞
press [OK].
Basic Scanning Features
3
When [PDF (Compct)] is selected as the File Format, if you specify the resolution
as other than [300x300 dpi] and press [OK], a message asking for your
confirmation to change the File Format appears on the screen.
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Send Basic Features
screen.
IMPORTANT
If [PDF (Compct)] is selected as the File Format, the resolution is automatically
changed to [300x300 dpi]. If you want to send the document with a resolution
setting that you specify, change the File Format setting to anything other than [PDF
(Compct)].
4
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When
scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
NOTE
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press
[Option] ➞ [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
3-16
Scan Settings
Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings
You can set the scan exposure and select the original type before scanning the
original.
Manual Exposure Adjustment
You can manually adjust the scan exposure to the most appropriate level for the
original.
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination.
3
2
Basic Scanning Features
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
Scan Settings
3-17
3
Press [ ] or [ ] to adjust the scanning exposure ➞ press
[OK].
Basic Scanning Features
3
Press [ ] to move the indicator to the left to make the exposure lighter, or press
[ ] to move it to the right to make the exposure darker.
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Send Basic Features
screen.
4
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When
scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
NOTE
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press
[Option] ➞ [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
3-18
Scan Settings
Original Type Selection
You can manually select the original type according to the type of image that you
are scanning. The following three original type modes are available for adjusting the
image quality.
IMPORTANT
• Combinations of these three modes (Text/Photo, Photo, and Text) cannot be set at once.
If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
• If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed photograph, the moiré
effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. If this happens, you can lesson this moiré
effect by using the Sharpness mode. (See "Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness)," on
p. 4-24.)
■ Text/Photo Mode
This mode is best suited for scanning originals containing both text and photos, such as
magazines or catalogs.
■ Photo Mode
This mode is best suited for scanning photos printed on photographic paper, or photo
originals containing halftones (e.g., printed photos).
■ Text Mode
This mode is best suited for scanning text originals. Blueprints or penciled originals can
also be scanned clearly. When [PDF (Compct)] is selected as the File Format, if the Text
mode is selected, the Image Level in Text Mode settings made in Image level for PDF
(Compct) in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from
the Additional Functions screen) are automatically activated.
Scan Settings
3-19
3
Basic Scanning Features
NOTE
If the original is a transparency, select the [Text/Photo], [Photo], or [Text] mode ➞ adjust
the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination.
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
2
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
3
Press the original type drop-down list ➞ select the original
type (Text/Photo, Photo, or Text).
Basic Scanning Features
3
Original Type
3-20
Scan Settings
● If you want to adjust the text/photo processing priority level for
[Text/Photo]:
❑ Press the original type drop-down list ➞ press [Priority Level].
Basic Scanning Features
3
❑ Adjust to give the degree of priority to text or photo ➞ press [OK] ➞ [OK].
[Text Priority]:
Priority is given to the faithful reproduction of text.
[Photo Priority]:
Priority is given to the faithful reproduction of photos, with
as little moiré effect as possible.
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Send Basic Features
screen.
4
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When
scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
Scan Settings
3-21
NOTE
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press
[Option] ➞ [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
Automatic Exposure Adjustment
The machine automatically adjusts the scan exposure to the level best suited to the
quality of the original.
Basic Scanning Features
3
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination.
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
2
3-22
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
Scan Settings
3
Press [A] ➞ [OK].
The scanning exposure is automatically adjusted to the level best suited to the
quality of the original.
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Send Basic Features
screen.
NOTE
Automatic exposure may not work with transparencies. If this happens, adjust the
exposure manually by pressing [ ] or [ ].
4
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When
scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
NOTE
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press
[Option] ➞ [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
Scan Settings
3-23
Basic Scanning Features
3
Changing Color Modes
This machine comes with two Automatic Color Selection features. Automatic Color
Selection (Full Color/Grayscale) detects and distinguishes color originals from
grayscale originals, while Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Black-and-White)
detects and distinguishes color originals from black-and-white originals. Depending
on the Automatic Color Selection feature that you select, the machine automatically
switches between the Full Color and Grayscale modes, or between the Full Color
and Black-and-White modes. You can also manually select the Full Color,
Grayscale, or Black-and-White mode whenever necessary.
Basic Scanning Features
3
IMPORTANT
• If the destination is an I-fax address, the original is always scanned and sent in the
Black-and-White mode.
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, and you are sending documents by fax,
the original is always scanned and sent in the Black-and-White mode.
NOTE
The default setting is 'Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale)'.
Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Grayscale)
If the Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Grayscale) mode is selected, the
machine automatically recognizes whether the original is in color or
black-and-white. Color originals are scanned in the Full Color mode, while
black-and-white originals are scanned in the Grayscale mode.
IMPORTANT
Color originals are scanned in the Full Color mode. However, originals that contain few
color sections, or originals with light color densities and colors close to black may be
scanned in the Grayscale mode. If this happens, select the Full Color mode manually.
(See "Full Color," on p. 3-28.)
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination.
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
3-24
Changing Color Modes
2
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
3
Press the color selection drop-down list ➞ press [Auto-Color
Select (Full Color/Grayscale)] ➞ [OK].
Color Selection
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Send Basic Features
screen.
4
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When
scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
Changing Color Modes
3-25
Basic Scanning Features
3
NOTE
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press
[Option] ➞ [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Black-and-White)
If the Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Black-and-White) mode is selected, the
machine automatically recognizes whether the original is in color or
black-and-white. Color originals are scanned in the Full Color mode, while
black-and-white originals are scanned in the Black-and-White mode.
Basic Scanning Features
3
IMPORTANT
Color originals are scanned in the Full Color mode. However, originals that contain few
color sections, or originals with light color densities and colors close to black may be
scanned in the Black-and-White mode. If this happens, select the Full Color mode
manually. (See "Full Color," on p. 3-28.)
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination.
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
2
3-26
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
Changing Color Modes
3
Press the color selection drop-down list ➞ press [Auto-Color
Select (Full Color/Black-and-White)] ➞ [OK].
Color Selection
When [PDF (Compct)] is selected as the File Format, if you specify [Auto-Color
Select (Full Color/Black-and-White)] as the color mode and press [OK], a
message asking for your confirmation to change the File Format appears on the
screen.
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Send Basic Features
screen.
IMPORTANT
If [PDF (Compct)] is selected as the File Format, the color mode is automatically
changed to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale)] even if you set the color
mode to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Black-and-White)]. If you want to send the
document in the Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Black-and-White) mode,
change the File Format setting to anything other than [PDF (Compct)].
4
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When
scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
NOTE
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press
[Option] ➞ [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
Changing Color Modes
3-27
Basic Scanning Features
3
Full Color
The Full Color mode always scans in color regardless of whether the original is in
color or black-and-white. If either of the Automatic Color Selection modes are
selected, originals that contain few color sections, or originals with light color
densities and colors close to black may be scanned in the Grayscale or
Black-and-White mode. If this happens, select the Full Color mode manually.
NOTE
Black-and-white originals scanned in the Full Color mode are counted as color scans.
3
Basic Scanning Features
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination.
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
2
3-28
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
Changing Color Modes
3
Press the color selection drop-down list ➞ press [Full Color]
➞ [OK].
Color Selection
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Send Basic Features
screen.
4
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When
scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
NOTE
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press
[Option] ➞ [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
Changing Color Modes
3-29
Basic Scanning Features
3
Grayscale
The Grayscale mode always scans in grayscale regardless of whether the original
is in color or black-and-white.
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination.
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
2
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
3
Press the color selection drop-down list ➞ press [Grayscale]
➞ [OK].
Basic Scanning Features
3
Color Selection
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Send Basic Features
screen.
3-30
Changing Color Modes
4
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When
scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
Black-and-White
The Black-and-White mode always scans in black-and-white regardless of whether
the original is in color or black-and-white.
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination.
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
2
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
Changing Color Modes
3-31
3
Basic Scanning Features
NOTE
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press
[Option] ➞ [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
3
Press the color selection drop-down list ➞ press [Black and
White] ➞ [OK].
Color Selection
Basic Scanning Features
3
When [PDF (Compct)] is selected as the File Format, if you specify [Black and
White] as the color mode and press [OK], a message asking for your
confirmation to change the File Format appears on the screen.
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Send Basic Features
screen.
IMPORTANT
If [PDF (Compct)] is selected as the File Format, the color mode is automatically
changed to [Grayscale] even if you set the color mode to [Black and White]. If you
want to send the document in the Black-and-White mode, change the File Format
setting to anything other than [PDF (Compct)].
4
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When
scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
NOTE
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press
[Option] ➞ [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
3-32
Changing Color Modes
Special Scanning Features
4
CHAPTER
This chapter describes how to set special scanning features.
Two-Page Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Original Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Book Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Binding Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Different Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Job Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Image Quality Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Remove Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Prevent Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
User Preset Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Storing Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Naming a User Preset Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Erasing Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
4-1
Two-Page Separation
This mode enables you to scan facing pages in a book or bound original to fit onto
separate pages.
IMPORTANT
• The Two-page Separation mode cannot be used together with the Document Size Select
(11x17+, Other Size), Two-sided Original, Different Size Originals, or Binding Erase
modes.
• Place your originals on the platen glass. The Two-page Separation mode cannot be used
when the original is placed in the feeder.
Special Scanning Features
4
1
Place your originals on the platen glass ➞ specify the
destination.
If you want to scan your originals in the correct page order, begin scanning from
the first open page of the book or bound original.
Place your originals face down with their top edge aligned with the back edge of
the platen glass (by the arrow in the top left corner).
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
2
4-2
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
Two-Page Separation
Press [Special Features].
4
Press [Two-page Separation].
4
Special Scanning Features
3
The selected mode is set.
5
Press [Done] ➞ [OK].
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
Two-Page Separation
4-3
6
Press
(Start).
Follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display ➞ press
once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].
(Start)
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
IMPORTANT
If the original contains fine text or print, such as a map, the machine may need to
read or scan the document several times. Do not remove the original from the
platen glass until scanning is complete.
NOTE
• To cancel this setting, press [Special Features] ➞ [Two-page Separation].
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press
[Option] ➞ [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
Special Scanning Features
4
4-4
Two-Page Separation
Frame Erase
This mode enables you to erase shadows and lines that appear when scanning
various types of originals.
The following three Frame Erase modes are available.
IMPORTANT
A combination of the three Frame Erase modes cannot be set. If you select one of these
modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
■ Original Frame Erase
■ Book Frame Erase
This mode erases the dark borders, as well as the center and counter lines that appear if
you are scanning the facing pages in a book or bound original.
■ Binding Erase
This mode erases the shadows that appear on the scanned image from binding holes on
originals.
Frame Erase
4-5
Special Scanning Features
4
This mode erases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the scanned
image if the original is smaller than the selected record size. You can also use this mode
to create a blank border around the edge of the scanned image.
Original Frame Erase
IMPORTANT
The Original Frame Erase mode cannot be used together with the Document Size Select
(11x17+, Auto, and Other Size) or Different Size Originals modes.
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination.
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
2
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
3
Press [Special Features] ➞ [Frame Erase].
Special Scanning Features
4
4-6
Frame Erase
Press [Original Frame Erase].
5
Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase width.
4
NOTE
• To enter values in millimeters, press [mm].
• When entering values in millimeters, you can also use
(numeric keys), and
(Clear) to clear your entries.
• You can change the values by pressing [-] or [+], even if you have entered the
values using
(numeric keys).
• If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an
appropriate value appears on the screen.
• The default setting is '1/8" (4 mm)'. The maximum width that you can set for the
Original Frame Erase mode is '1 15/16" (50 mm)'.
● If you want to set the same width for all four borders:
❑ Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase width ➞ press [Next].
Frame Erase
4-7
Special Scanning Features
4
● If you want to set the top, left, right, and bottom widths
independently:
❑ Press [Adjust Each Dim.].
❑ Select the frame erase border(s) ➞ press [-] or [+] to set the respective frame
erase width(s) ➞ press [Next].
Special Scanning Features
4
To return to the screen for setting the same width for all four borders, press
[Adjust All At Once].
6
Select the original size ➞ press [OK].
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Special Features screen.
IMPORTANT
You can set the Original Frame Erase mode only for the original paper sizes that
are displayed on the screen.
NOTE
To select an A or B series paper size, press [A/B-size].
4-8
Frame Erase
7
Press [Done] ➞ [OK].
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When
scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
NOTE
• To cancel this setting, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option]
➞ [Special Features] ➞ [Frame Erase] ➞ [Cancel].
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press
[Option] ➞ [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
Frame Erase
4-9
4
Special Scanning Features
8
Book Frame Erase
IMPORTANT
The Book Frame Erase mode cannot be used together with the Document Size Select
(11x17+, Auto, and Other Size) or Different Size Originals modes.
1
Place your original on the platen glass ➞ specify the
destination.
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
2
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
3
Press [Special Features] ➞ [Frame Erase].
Special Scanning Features
4
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 3 of "Original Frame Erase," on p. 4-6.
4-10
Frame Erase
Press [Book Frame Erase].
5
Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase widths.
4
NOTE
• To enter values in millimeters, press [mm].
• When entering values in millimeters, you can also use
(numeric keys), and
(Clear) to clear your entries.
• You can change the values by pressing [-] or [+], even if you have entered the
values using
(numeric keys).
• If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an
appropriate value appears on the screen.
• The default settings are '3/8" (10 mm)' for [Center] and '1/8" (4 mm)' for [Top], [Left],
[Right], and [Bottom]. The maximum width that you can set for the Book Frame
Erase mode is '1 15/16" (50 mm)'.
● If you want to set the same width for all four borders:
❑ Press [Center] and [Sides] ➞ press [-] or [+] to set their respective frame erase
widths ➞ press [Next].
Frame Erase
4-11
Special Scanning Features
4
● If you want to set the top, left, center, right, and bottom widths
independently:
❑ Press [Adjust Each Dim.].
❑ Select the frame erase border(s) ➞ press [-] or [+] to set their respective frame
erase width(s) ➞ press [Next].
Special Scanning Features
4
To return to the screen for setting the same width for all four borders, press
[Adjust All At Once].
6
Select the size of the bound original when it is open ➞ press
[OK].
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Special Features screen.
IMPORTANT
You can set the Book Frame Erase mode only for the original paper sizes that are
displayed on the screen.
NOTE
To select an A or B series paper size, press [A/B-size].
4-12
Frame Erase
7
Press [Done] ➞ [OK].
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
8
Press
(Start).
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
IMPORTANT
If the original contains fine text or print, such as a map, the machine may need to
read or scan the document several times. Do not remove the original from the
platen glass until scanning is complete.
Binding Erase
IMPORTANT
• The Binding Erase mode cannot be used together with the Document Size Select
(11x17+ and Other Size), or Two-page Separation modes.
• Do not place originals with binding holes in the feeder, as this may damage the originals.
1
Place your originals on the platen glass ➞ specify the
destination.
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
Frame Erase
4-13
4
Special Scanning Features
NOTE
• To cancel this setting, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option] ➞
[Special Features] ➞ [Frame Erase] ➞ [Cancel].
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press
[Option] ➞ [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
Special Scanning Features
4
2
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
3
Press [Special Features] ➞ [Frame Erase].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 3 of "Original Frame Erase," on p. 4-6.
4
Press [Binding Erase] ➞ select the border where the binding
holes are located.
The border is where the binding holes are located on the original, if you first
visualize the original as being face up.
4-14
Frame Erase
6
Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase width ➞ press [OK].
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Special Features screen.
4
NOTE
• To enter values in millimeters, press [mm].
• When entering values in millimeters, you can also use
(numeric keys), and
(Clear) to clear your entries.
• You can change the values by pressing [-] or [+], even if you have entered the
values using
(numeric keys).
• If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an
appropriate value appears on the screen.
• The default setting is '3/4" (18 mm)'. The maximum width that you can set for the
Binding Erase mode is '13/16" (20 mm)'.
Special Scanning Features
5
Press [Done] ➞ [OK].
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
7
Press
(Start).
Follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display ➞ press
once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].
(Start)
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
Frame Erase
4-15
NOTE
• To cancel this setting, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option] ➞
[Special Features] ➞ [Frame Erase] ➞ [Cancel].
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press
[Option] ➞ [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
Special Scanning Features
4
4-16
Frame Erase
Different Size Originals
This mode enables you to scan different size originals together. However, the length
(vertical direction) of the different paper sizes must be the same. For example, LTR
and 11" x 17", or STMT and LTRR paper sizes can be scanned together.
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination.
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
2
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
Different Size Originals
4-17
4
Special Scanning Features
IMPORTANT
• The Different Size Originals mode cannot be used together with the Two-page
Separation, Original Frame Erase, or Book Frame Erase modes.
• If Document Size Select is set to anything but 'Auto', all the originals are scanned in the
specified size. If you want to scan the originals in their original sizes, make sure to set
Document Size Select to [Auto].
• If the originals are placed in the feeder, make sure that the different size originals are of
the same weight (paper type).
• You cannot mix originals of different lengths together, such as LTR and LGL, or 11" x 17"
and STMT.
• If the Different Size Originals mode is set, the scanning speed is slower than normal.
3
Press [Special Features] ➞ [Different Size Originals].
The selected mode is set.
Special Scanning Features
4
4
Press [Done] ➞ [OK].
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
5
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When
scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
NOTE
• To cancel this setting, press [Special Features] ➞ [Different Size Originals].
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press
[Option] ➞ [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
4-18
Different Size Originals
Job Build
This mode enables you to scan originals that are too many to be placed at once, by
dividing them into multiple batches. You can use both the feeder and the platen
glass for scanning. The originals are sent as one document, after all the batches
have been scanned.
NOTE
• If you place different size originals in the feeder, set the Different Size Originals mode.
However, the length (vertical direction) of the different paper sizes must be the same. For
example, LTR and 11" x 17", or STMT and LTRR paper sizes can be placed together.
• If you want to scan one-sided and two sided originals and store them as two-sided
documents, divide the originals up into one-sided and two-sided batches. For example, if
the first batch consists of two-sided originals, set the 2-Sided Original mode. Therefore,
you have to manually set or cancel the 2-Sided Original mode for each batch of originals
that you scan.
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination.
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
Job Build
4-19
4
Special Scanning Features
IMPORTANT
• The Job Build mode cannot be used together with the Document Size Select (Other Size)
mode.
• You cannot change the scan settings while the machine is scanning originals in the Job
Build mode. You need to set the necessary scan settings beforehand, according to the
type of originals.
• You can change or specify the following settings before scanning the next batch of
originals (i.e., between batches): the Document Size Select (Auto or manual) mode, scan
exposure, original type, 2-sided Original mode, and color modes.
• If you place your originals in the feeder, remove the originals from the original output area
when the scanning of each batch is complete.
• The maximum number of pages that can be sent at one time is 500. When using the Job
Build mode, a message appears to ask you if you want to send the job when 500 pages
of originals have been scanned. If you select to send the job, the scanned 500 pages are
sent. If you cancel the job, the scanned pages are not sent.
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ [Option].
3
Press Special Features ➞ [Job Build].
Special Scanning Features
4
2
The selected mode is set.
4
Press [Done] ➞ [OK].
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
4-20
Job Build
5
Press
(Start).
Scanning starts.
NOTE
• To cancel scanning, press [Cancel] or
(Stop).
• To cancel this setting, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option] ➞
[Special Features] ➞ [Job Build].
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press
[Option] ➞ [Cancel].
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
When scanning is complete, place your next batch of
originals ➞ press
(Start).
If you want to change the scan settings, do so before pressing
4
(Start).
Special Scanning Features
6
You can select the document size. (See "Document Size," on p. 3-7.)
You can change the scan exposure and the original type setting. (See "Scan
Exposure and Original Type Settings," on p. 3-17.)
You can change the color mode setting. (See "Changing Color Modes," on
p. 3-24.)
You can change the one-sided or two-sided original setting. (See "Two-Sided
Originals," on p. 3-5.)
Job Build
4-21
● If the original is two-sided:
❑ Press [2-Sided Original].
4
Special Scanning Features
❑ Select the type of two-sided original ➞ press [OK].
[Book Type]:
The front and back sides of the original have the same
top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]:
The front and back sides of the original have opposite
top-bottom orientations.
Do not forget to set or cancel the 2-Sided Original mode, according to the
type of originals that you place next.
To cancel the 2-Sided Original mode, press [2-Sided Original] ➞ [Cancel].
Repeat this step, if necessary.
IMPORTANT
If the original contains fine text or print, such as a map, the machine may need to
read or scan the document several times. Do not remove the original from the
platen glass until you are sure that the machine has finished scanning it.
NOTE
[2-Sided Original] is displayed only if the optional Feeder (DADF-K1) is attached.
4-22
Job Build
After the last batch of originals is scanned, press [Done].
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.
4
NOTE
If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
Job Build
4-23
Special Scanning Features
7
Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness)
This mode enables you to scan original images with a sharper or softer contrast. To
scan text or lines sharply, use the [High] setting. To scan originals containing
printed photographs or other halftones, use the [Low] setting.
■ Low
If you want to scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed photograph, using
the Photo mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. However, you
can lessen the moiré effect by using the [Low] setting to produce a clearer image.
4
■ High
Special Scanning Features
This setting enhances the edges of original images so that faint or fine text is scanned
with a sharper contrast. This setting is particularly suited for scanning blueprints and faint
pencil drawn images.
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination.
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
2
4-24
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness)
Press [Special Features] ➞ [Sharpness].
4
Press [Low] or [High] to adjust the sharpness ➞ press [OK].
4
Special Scanning Features
3
To scan text or lines clearly, use the [High] setting. To scan originals containing
printed photographs or other halftones, use the [Low] setting.
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Special Functions screen.
5
Press [Done] ➞ [OK].
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness)
4-25
6
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When
scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
NOTE
• To cancel this setting, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option] ➞
[Special Features] ➞ [Sharpness] ➞ [Cancel].
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press
[Option] ➞[Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
Special Scanning Features
4
4-26
Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness)
Image Quality Adjustment
You can make settings that adjust the scan exposure. If you select [A] (Auto) as the
scan exposure on the Scan Settings screen, the scan exposure is automatically
adjusted. The following two types of scan exposure adjustments are available on
the Image Quality Adjustment screen.
■ Remove Background
This mode enables you to scan originals by erasing the background color of the original.
This feature is especially useful for scanning originals, such as catalogues and paper, that
have turned yellow from age.
■ Prevent Bleeding
This mode enables you to scan originals by preventing the original image on the reverse
side of thin originals from bleeding through and being scanned as well.
Remove Background
This mode enables you to scan originals by erasing the background color of the
original. This feature is especially useful for scanning originals, such as catalogues
and paper, that have turned yellow from age.
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination.
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
Image Quality Adjustment
4-27
4
Special Scanning Features
IMPORTANT
• If [A] (Auto) is selected as the scan exposure on the Scan Settings screen, pressing
[Image Qty Adjustment] and making fine adjustments cancels the automatic scan
exposure setting. Similarly, if you select [A] (Auto) for the scan exposure when image
quality adjustments have been made, the Image Quality Adjustment mode is canceled
and automatic scan exposure is used instead.
• The Remove Background mode cannot be used together with the Prevent Bleeding
mode.
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
3
Press [A] ➞ [Special Features].
4
Press [Image Qty Adjustment].
Special Scanning Features
4
2
4-28
Image Quality Adjustment
Press [Remove Background].
If the background color remains or if you want to make the background color
darker when the original is scanned in the Remove Background mode, make fine
adjustment to the density of the background color.
If you want to make fine adjustments to the density of the background color,
press [Fine Adjustment] ➞ press [+] or [-] to specify the amount of each color
that you want to remove ➞ press [OK].
For example, when the background color (yellow) of the yellowed original
remains, press [-] next to <Yellow> to adjust the density.
Adjusting Yellow automatically adjusts the levels of Red and Green to the same
level as Yellow. On the other hand, adjusting the levels of Red or Green, sets
Yellow back to its default level.
NOTE
• Pressing [-] or [+] adjusts the density of each color. Press [-] to make the color
lighter, or [+] to make the color darker.
• If you make fine adjustments to the density, automatic scan exposure is canceled
and the original is scanned according to the settings made in Fine Adjustment.
Image Quality Adjustment
4-29
4
Special Scanning Features
5
6
Press [OK] ➞ [Done] ➞ [OK].
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Send Basic Features
screen.
7
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When
scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
NOTE
• To cancel this setting, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option] ➞
[Special Features] ➞ [Image Qty Adjustment] ➞ [Cancel].
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press
[Option] ➞ [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
Special Scanning Features
4
4-30
Image Quality Adjustment
Prevent Bleeding
This mode enables you to scan originals by preventing the original image on the
reverse side of thin originals from bleeding through and being scanned as well.
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination.
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
2
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
Special Scanning Features
4
3
Press [A] ➞ [Special Features] ➞ [Image Qty Adjustment].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 3 and 4 of "Remove Background," on
p. 4-27.
Image Quality Adjustment
4-31
4
Press [Prevent Bleed-thru].
If you want to make fine adjustments to the density, press [Fine Adjustment] ➞
press [-] or [+] to specify the amount of bleeding that you want to prevent ➞
press [OK].
Special Scanning Features
4
[-]: This setting prevents dark areas on the reverse side of the original from
bleeding through and being scanned, but light areas on the front side may
not be scanned either.
[+]: This setting may not be able to completely prevent dark areas on the
reverse side of the original from bleeding through and being scanned, but
light areas on the front side of the original are always scanned.
NOTE
If you make fine adjustment to the density, automatic scan exposure is canceled
and the original is scanned according to the setting made in Fine Adjustment.
5
Press [OK] ➞ [Done] ➞ [OK].
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Send Basic Features
screen.
4-32
Image Quality Adjustment
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When
scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
NOTE
• To cancel this setting, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option] ➞
[Special Features] ➞ [Image Qty Adjustment] ➞ [Cancel].
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press
[Option] ➞ [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
Image Quality Adjustment
4-33
4
Special Scanning Features
6
User Preset Keys
You can set any possible combination of scan settings and store them in a user
preset key in memory. There are eight user preset keys, six of which have preset
scan modes already set from the factory. The remaining two user preset keys (P7
and P8) are available for the user to set and store, and can be assigned names for
increased convenience. You can also change the settings and assigned names for
the six preset scan keys, and store them as user-defined scan modes (user preset
keys). This feature is useful for storing frequently used scan settings.
Once user preset keys are stored, they are displayed in the Scan Settings
drop-down list, and can be selected in the same way as the six preset scan modes
ACS 200 x 200 dpi, ACS 300 x 300 dpi, Black 200 x 200 dpi, Black 300 x 300 dpi,
ACS 600 x 600 dpi, and Black 600 x 600 dpi.
Special Scanning Features
4
NOTE
The scan settings stored as user preset keys in memory are not erased, even if you turn
the machine's power OFF.
Storing Scan Settings
1
4-34
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
User Preset Keys
Specify the scan settings that you want to store.
NOTE
In the example above, the Document Size Select and the Job Build modes are
specified.
3
Press [Store/Erase].
User Preset Keys
4-35
4
Special Scanning Features
2
4
Select a user preset key for storing the scan settings ➞ press
[Store].
User Preset Key
4
Special Scanning Features
The icons that are displayed are explained below:
Icon
Color Mode
Resolution
Automatic Color Selection
100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi,
200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi
Automatic Color Selection
200 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi,
400 x 400 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
Full Color
100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi,
200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi
Full Color
200 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi,
400 x 400 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
Grayscale, Black-and-White
100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi,
200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi
Grayscale, Black-and-White
200 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi,
400 x 400 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
(Not Stored)
NOTE
• Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle
( ) in the lower right corner of the key.
• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
• If there are more stored scan settings than are currently displayed, you can scroll
through the list by pressing [▼] or [▲].
4-36
User Preset Keys
● If you select a key without settings:
❑ A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to store the settings. Press
[Yes].
Once the settings are stored, the message <Stored in memory.> appears for
approximately two seconds on the touch panel display.
The key in which you stored the settings is displayed with a colored triangle
( ) in the lower right corner of the key, and the settings are displayed.
The stored settings are displayed.
● If you select a key that already has settings stored in it:
❑ A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to overwrite the previous
settings. Press [Yes].
To cancel storing the settings, press [No].
Once the settings are stored, the message <Stored in memory.> appears for
approximately two seconds on the touch panel display.
The stored settings are displayed.
User Preset Keys
4-37
Special Scanning Features
4
To cancel storing the settings, press [No].
5
Press [Done] ➞ [OK].
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
NOTE
You can also assign a name to a user preset key by pressing [Register Name].
Naming a User Preset Key
1
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
2
Press [Store/Erase].
Special Scanning Features
4
4-38
User Preset Keys
3
Select a user preset key to name ➞ press [Register Name].
User Preset Key
4
Enter a name ➞ press [OK].
Two lines can be used for a user preset key name.
You can enter up to eight characters per line.
The assigned name appears on the key.
User Preset Keys
4-39
4
Special Scanning Features
NOTE
• Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle
( ) in the lower right corner of the key.
• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
• You can also assign names to keys with no settings stored in them.
• If there are more stored scan settings than are currently displayed, you can scroll
through the list by pressing [▼] or [▲].
NOTE
• For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• If you press [OK] without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its
current name (default P1 to P8).
5
Press [Done] ➞ [OK].
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
Erasing Scan Settings
1
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
2
Press [Store/Erase].
Special Scanning Features
4
4-40
User Preset Keys
3
Select the user preset key with the scan settings that you
want to erase ➞ press [Erase].
User Preset Key
IMPORTANT
Make sure to check the settings before erasing them.
NOTE
• Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle
( ) in the lower right corner of the key.
• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
• If there are more stored scan settings than are currently displayed, you can scroll
through the list by pressing [▼] or [▲].
4
Press [Yes].
To cancel erasing the settings, press [No].
User Preset Keys
4-41
Special Scanning Features
4
A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to erase the settings.
4
The stored scan settings are erased.
Special Scanning Features
The message <Erased.> appears for approximately two seconds on the touch
panel display.
NOTE
Key names are not erased. For instructions on changing a key name, see "Naming
a User Preset Key," on p. 4-38.
5
Press [Done] ➞ [OK].
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
4-42
User Preset Keys
Sending Documents
5
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the fundamental procedures for sending documents, how to configure
send settings, and other useful features.
Sending Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Sending an E-Mail Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Sending an I-Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Sending a Job to a File Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Sending a Job to a User Inbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Delaying a Send Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Previewing Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Job Done Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Job Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5-1
Sending Methods
You can enter a subject line, message body text, and an e-mail, I-fax, or file server
address to which to send documents. Documents can be sent without changing any
of the send settings, or you can configure them to suit your needs.
When you send a document, you can also set to send a document at a preset time.
IMPORTANT
If you send an image as a TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) or an MTIFF (Multiple page
TIFF) file to a Macintosh, the recipient may not be able to view the image correctly. If this
happens, send the image as a PDF file, or view the TIFF or MTIFF file with an
application, such as Apple QuickTime Player.
Sending an E-Mail Message
Sending Documents
5
You can scan a document and send it as an attached file in an e-mail message. You
can add the document's name, a subject line, message body text, reply-to address,
and the sender's name. The scanned document can be sent as a JPEG, TIFF,
MTIFF, or PDF file.
1
5-2
Place your originals ➞ specify the e-mail address destination
➞ press [Send Settings].
Sending Methods
NOTE
• For instructions on placing your originals, see "Placing Originals," on p. 1-35.
• For instructions on specifying an e-mail address, see "Specifying an E-Mail
Address," on p. 2-6.
• For instructions on specifying addresses stored in the Address Book, see "Using
the Address Book," on p. 2-2.
• For instructions on specifying addresses not registered in the Address Book, see
"Using the New Address Tab," on p. 2-5.
• For instructions on specifying addresses using the one-touch buttons, see "Using
the One-Touch Buttons," on p. 2-34.
• For instructions on specifying addresses and settings using the favorites buttons,
see "Using the Favorites Buttons," on p. 2-36.
• For instructions on specifying a destination by searching through the directory
listings on a server on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol), see "Using a Server," on p. 2-38.
• You can also set the scan mode for your documents. See "Selecting a Scan Mode,"
on p. 3-2.
Press [Send Doc. Name].
Sending Documents
2
5
Sending Methods
5-3
3
Enter the name of the document that you want to send ➞
press [OK].
You can enter up to 24 characters for the document's name.
You can also use
clear your entry.
Sending Documents
5
-
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to
NOTE
• For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• When you are sending documents, each page is sent as a separate image
attached to an e-mail message, and the extension of the document matches the file
format that you select for sending. The file name prefix of the image attached to the
e-mail message is assigned as follows:
- If you set the document's name:
The file name prefix is generated by the document's name and three digits that
signify the page number of the image.
Example: document name_002.tif
- If you do not set the document's name:
The file name prefix is generated by the job number (0001 to 4999) and three
digits that signify the page number of the image.
Example: 1042_002.tif
5-4
Sending Methods
4
Press [Subject].
5
Enter the subject of the e-mail message ➞ press [OK].
Sending Documents
5
You can enter up to 40 characters for the subject.
You can also use
clear your entry.
-
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to
NOTE
• For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• If you do not enter a subject, the default subject set in E-mail/I-Fax Settings is used.
To access the E-mail/I-Fax Settings screen, press
(Additional Functions) ➞
[System Settings] ➞ [Communications Settings] ➞ [E-mail/I-Fax Settings]. (See
"E-Mail/I-Fax Settings," on p. 10-4.)
Sending Methods
5-5
6
Press [Message].
7
Enter the message body text ➞ press [OK].
Sending Documents
5
You can enter up to 140 characters for the e-mail message. A hard return is
counted as one character.
You can also use
clear your entry.
-
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to
NOTE
For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
5-6
Sending Methods
Press [Reply-to].
9
Select the reply-to address.
● If Access Number Management is set to 'On', and you want to select
a destination that is stored with an access number or in a private
address book:
❑ Press [Access Number].
Sending Methods
5-7
5
Sending Documents
8
❑ Enter the access number using
-
(numeric keys) for the private address
book or destination ➞ press [OK].
If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with
the Access Number setting are displayed.
To cancel entering the Access Number, press [Cancel].
5
Sending Documents
❑ Select the destination ➞ press [OK].
5-8
Sending Methods
● If Access Number Management is set to 'Off', or the destination is
not stored with an access number or in a private address book:
❑ Select the destination ➞ press [OK].
Press the alphabet keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the range of entries. Press the
same key again to return to the full address list.
Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books
(subaddress books 1 to 10, or one-touch buttons). Subaddress books
categorize the addresses stored in the Address Book.
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, you can also specify fax
numbers as the reply-to address.
The selected destination is set as the reply-to e-mail address.
IMPORTANT
You need to store reply-to addresses in the Address Book beforehand. (See
"E-Mail Addresses," on p. 9-5.)
NOTE
• You cannot select multiple destinations.
• To display [Access Number], set the Access Number Management to 'On'. To
access the Access Number Management setting, press
(Additional Functions)
➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Manage/Access to Address Book] ➞ [Access Number
Management]. (See "Manage/Access to Address Book," on p. 10-22.)
• To cancel a selected reply-to address, select the address again.
• To view the detailed information of a selected reply-to address, select the address
➞ press [Details].
Sending Methods
5-9
5
Sending Documents
If the desired reply-to address is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to
the desired reply-to address.
10 Press [Sender's Names (TTI)].
11 Select a sender's name ➞ press [OK].
Sending Documents
5
The name registered under <00> is selected by default.
If the desired sender's name is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired sender's name.
You can also enter the number of the desired sender's name using
(numeric keys).
-
NOTE
• To use this feature, you must store sender names beforehand. (See "Registering
Sender Names," on p. 1-16.)
• If you set the unit's name in TX Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the
unit's name is automatically registered as <00>. To set the unit's name, press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings] ➞ [TX Settings] under
<Common Settings> ➞ press [Unit Name]. (See "Registering the Unit's Name," on
p. 1-19.)
5-10
Sending Methods
12 Press the E-mail Priority drop-down list ➞ select a priority for
your e-mail message.
13 Press [Done].
Sending Documents
5
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
Sending Methods
5-11
14 Press the File Format drop-down list ➞ select a file format.
File Formats:
Sending Documents
5
[TIFF/JPEG]:
Sends images in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or JPEG
(Grayscale/Color) format.
[MTIFF/PDF]:
Enables you to insert multiple images into a single MTIFF or
PDF file. Sends the file in either the MTIFF (Black-and-White)
or PDF (Grayscale/Color) format.
[PDF/PDF]:
Enables you to insert multiple images into a single PDF file.
Sends the file in the PDF format regardless of the color mode.
[PDF (Compct)]: Enables you to send files containing text originals or text/photo
originals using a high compression ratio. You can also send
multiple images together as one PDF file.
When [PDF (Compct)] is selected, the Auto-Color Select (Full
Color/Black-and-White) and Black-and-White color modes
cannot be set together.
If you select [PDF (Compct)] as the file format, it is
recommended that you set the original type setting to either
'Text/Photo' or 'Text', depending on the image type.
IMPORTANT
If [PDF (Compct)] is selected as the File Format, the resolution is automatically
changed to [300x300 dpi]. If the color mode is set to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/
Black-and-White)] or [Black and White], the color mode is automatically changed to
[Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale)] or [Grayscale] respectively. If you want to
send the document with the resolution setting and the color mode that you specify,
change the File Format setting to anything other than [PDF (Compct)].
5-12
Sending Methods
NOTE
• In order to view a JPEG file, a software application that supports the JPEG file
format is required.
• In order to view a TIFF or MTIFF file, a software application that supports TIFF or
MTIFF file formats (such as Imaging for Windows) is required.
• In order to view a PDF file, Adobe Acrobat Reader is required.
• For more information on the different file formats, see "File Formats," in the
Glossary, on p. 13-12.
• If [PDF (Compct)] is selected as the File Format, set JPEG Compression Ratio in
TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) to 'Normal' or 'Low Ratio'. If the JPEG Compression
Ratio is set to 'High Ratio', the image output may be of a low quality even if [Image
Priority] is selected in Image Level for PDF (Compct) in TX Settings under
<Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen). (See "JPEG Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs," on p. 8-6.)
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When
scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
NOTE
If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
Sending Methods
5-13
5
Sending Documents
15 Press
Sending an I-Fax
You can scan a document, and send it to a destination via the Internet as an I-fax.
An I-fax can only be sent to machines that can receive faxes through the Internet.
You can add the document's name, a subject line, message body text, reply-to
address, and the sender's name.
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the I-fax destination ➞ press
[Send Settings].
Sending Documents
5
NOTE
• For instructions on placing your originals, see "Placing Originals," on p. 1-35.
• For instructions on specifying the I-fax address, see "Specifying an I-Fax Address,"
on p. 2-8.
• For instructions on specifying addresses stored in the Address Book, see "Using
the Address Book," on p. 2-2.
• For instructions on specifying addresses not registered in the Address Book, see
"Using the New Address Tab," on p. 2-5.
• For instructions on specifying addresses using the one-touch buttons, see "Using
the One-Touch Buttons," on p. 2-34.
• For instructions on specifying addresses and settings using the favorites buttons,
see "Using the Favorites Buttons," on p. 2-36.
• To specify a destination by searching through the directory listings on a server on
the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol), see "Using a
Server," on p. 2-38.
• You can also set the scan mode for your documents. See "Selecting a Scan Mode,"
on p. 3-2.
5-14
Sending Methods
3
Press [Send Doc. Name].
Enter the name of the document that you want to send ➞
press [OK].
5
Sending Documents
2
You can enter up to 24 characters for the document's name.
You can also use
clear your entry.
-
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to
NOTE
• For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• When you are sending documents, each page is sent as a separate TIFF image
attached to the I-fax. The file name prefix of the image attached to the I-fax is
assigned as follows:
- If you set the document's name:
The file name prefix is generated by the document's name and three digits that
signify the page number of the image.
Example: document name_002.tif
Sending Methods
5-15
- If you do not set the document's name:
The file name prefix is generated by the job number (0001 to 4999) and three
digits that signify the page number of the image.
Example: 1042_002.tif
4
Press [Subject].
5
Enter the subject of your I-fax ➞ press [OK].
Sending Documents
5
You can enter up to 40 characters for the subject.
You can also use
clear your entry.
-
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to
NOTE
• For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• If you do not enter a subject, the default subject set in E-mail/I-Fax Settings is used.
To access the E-mail/I-Fax Settings screen, press
(Additional Functions) ➞
[System Settings] ➞ [Communications Settings] ➞ [E-mail/I-Fax Settings]. (See
"E-Mail/I-Fax Settings," on p. 10-4.)
5-16
Sending Methods
6
Press [Message].
7
Enter the message body text ➞ press [OK].
Sending Documents
5
You can enter up to 140 characters for the message. A hard return is counted as
one character.
You can also use
clear your entry.
-
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to
NOTE
For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
Sending Methods
5-17
5
8
Press [Reply-to].
9
Select the reply-to address.
Sending Documents
● If Access Number Management is set to 'On', and you want to select
a destination that is stored with an access number or in a private
address book:
❑ Press [Access Number].
5-18
Sending Methods
❑ Enter the access number using
-
(numeric keys) for the private address
book or destination ➞ press [OK].
If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with
the Access Number setting are displayed.
To cancel entering the Access Number, press [Cancel].
5
Sending Documents
❑ Select the destination ➞ press [OK].
Sending Methods
5-19
● If Access Number Management is set to 'Off', or the destination is
not stored with an access number or in a private address book:
❑ Select the destination ➞ press [OK].
If the desired reply-to address is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to
the desired reply-to address.
5
Sending Documents
Press the alphabet keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the range of entries. Press the
same key again to return to the full address list.
Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books
(subaddress books 1 to 10, or one-touch buttons). Subaddress books
categorize the addresses stored in the Address Book.
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, you can also specify fax
numbers as the reply-to address.
The selected destination is set as the reply-to address. A Full Mode Delivery
Confirmation message will be sent to the selected reply-to address.
IMPORTANT
You need to store reply-to addresses in the Address Book beforehand. (See
"E-Mail Addresses," on p. 9-5.)
NOTE
• You cannot select multiple destinations.
• To display [Access Number], set Access Number Management to 'On'. To access
the Access Number Management setting, press
(Additional Functions) ➞
[System Settings] ➞ [Manage/Access to Address Book] ➞ [Access Number
Management]. (See "Manage/Access to Address Book," on p. 10-22.)
• To cancel a selected reply-to address, select the address again.
• To view the detailed information of a selected reply-to address, select the address
➞ press [Details].
5-20
Sending Methods
10 Press [Sender's Names (TTI)].
11 Select a sender's name ➞ press [OK].
Sending Documents
5
The name registered under <00> is selected by default.
If the desired sender's name is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired sender's name.
You can also enter the number of the desired sender's name using
(numeric keys).
-
IMPORTANT
If the TX Terminal ID setting is set to 'Off', the sender's name will not be printed on
the recipient's recording paper, even if you select one. To have the sender's name
printed on every I-fax you send, you must set the TX Terminal ID to 'On'. To access
the TX Terminal ID setting, press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications
Settings] ➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [▼] ➞ [TX Terminal ID].
Sending Methods
5-21
NOTE
• To use this feature, you must store sender names beforehand. (See "Registering
Sender Names," on p. 1-16.)
• If you set the unit's name in TX Settings, the unit's name is automatically registered
as <00>. To set the unit's name, press
(Additional Functions) ➞
[Communications Settings] ➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ press
[Unit Name]. (See "Registering the Unit's Name," on p. 1-19.)
12 Press [Done].
Sending Documents
5
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
13 Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When
scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
NOTE
If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
5-22
Sending Methods
Sending a Job to a File Server
You can send a job to any computer that acts as a file server on the network. The
following procedure explains how to specify the document's name and the file
format of the image you are sending.
Place your originals ➞ specify the File Server's destination ➞
press [Send Settings].
5
NOTE
• For instructions on placing your originals, see "Placing Originals," on p. 1-35.
• For instructions on specifying the file server's destination, see "Specifying a File
Server," on p. 2-13.
• For instructions on specifying addresses using the Address Book, see "Using the
Address Book," on p. 2-2.
• For instructions on specifying addresses not registered in the Address Book, see
"Using the New Address Tab," on p. 2-5.
• For instructions on specifying addresses using the one-touch buttons, see "Using
the One-Touch Buttons," on p. 2-34.
• For instructions on specifying addresses and settings using the favorites buttons,
see "Using the Favorites Buttons," on p. 2-36.
• You can also set the scan mode for your documents. See "Selecting a Scan Mode,"
on p. 3-2.
Sending Methods
5-23
Sending Documents
1
2
3
Enter the name of the document that you want to send ➞
press [OK].
Sending Documents
5
Press [Send Doc. Name].
You can enter up to 24 characters for the document's name.
You can also use
clear your entry.
-
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to
IMPORTANT
If you use characters such as ",", "/", "[", or "]" in the document name, you may not
be able to send the file to file servers that run on operating systems that do not
recognize such characters.
5-24
Sending Methods
4
Press [Done].
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
Sending Methods
5-25
5
Sending Documents
NOTE
• For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• When you are sending documents, each page is sent as a separate image and
stored in a file server. The extension of the document matches the file format that
you select for sending. The file name prefix of the image attached to the document
you are sending is assigned as follows:
- If you set the document's name (TIFF or JPEG):
The file name prefix is generated by the document's name, the year, month, day,
hour, minute, and second the document is sent, and five digits that signify the
page number of the image.
Example: document name_20030410203000_00002.tif
document name_20030410203000_00002.jpg
- If you set the document's name (MTIFF or PDF):
The file name prefix is generated by the document's name and the year, month,
day, hour, minute, and second the document is sent.
Example: document name_20030410203000.tif
document name_20030410203000.pdf
- If you do not set the document's name (TIFF or JPEG):
The file name prefix is generated by the year, month, day, hour, minute, and
second the document is sent, and the five digits that signify the page number of
the image.
Example: 20030410203000_00002.tif
20030410203000_00002.jpg
- If you do not set the document's name (MTIFF or PDF):
The file name prefix is generated by the year, month, day, hour, minute, and
second the document is sent.
Example: 20030410203000.tif
20030410203000.pdf
5
Press the File Format drop-down list ➞ select a file format.
File Formats:
Sending Documents
5
[TIFF/JPEG]:
Sends images in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or JPEG
(Grayscale/Color) format.
[MTIFF/PDF]:
Enables you to insert multiple images into a single MTIFF or
PDF file. Sends the file in either the MTIFF (Black-and-White)
or PDF (Grayscale/Color) format.
[PDF/PDF]:
Enables you to insert multiple images into a single PDF file.
Sends the file in the PDF format regardless of the color mode.
[PDF (Compct)]: Enables you to send files containing text originals or text/photo
originals using a high compression ratio. You can also send
multiple images together as one PDF file.
When [PDF (Compct)] is selected, the Auto-Color Select (Full
Color/Black-and-White) and Black-and-White color modes
cannot be set together.
If you select [PDF (Compct)] as the file format, it is
recommended that you set the original type setting to either
'Text/Photo' or 'Text', depending on the image type.
IMPORTANT
If [PDF (Compct)] is selected as the File Format, the resolution is automatically
changed to [300x300 dpi]. If the color mode is set to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/
Black-and-White)] or [Black and White], the color mode is automatically changed to
[Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale)] or [Grayscale] respectively. If you want to
send the document with the resolution setting and the color mode that you specify,
change the File Format setting to anything other than [PDF (Compct)].
5-26
Sending Methods
NOTE
• In order to view a JPEG file, a software application that supports the JPEG file
format is required.
• In order to view a TIFF or MTIFF file, a software application that supports the TIFF
or MTIFF file formats (such as Imaging for Windows) is required.
• In order to view a PDF file, Adobe Acrobat Reader is required.
• For more information on the different file formats, see "File Formats," in the
Glossary, on p. 13-12.
• If [PDF (Compct)] is selected as the File Format, set JPEG Compression Ratio in
TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) to 'Normal' or 'Low Ratio'. If the JPEG Compression
Ratio is set to 'High Ratio', the image output may be of a low quality even if [Image
Priority] is selected in Image Level for PDF (Compct) in TX Settings under
<Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen). (See "JPEG Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs," on p. 8-6.)
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When
scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
NOTE
If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
Sending Methods
5-27
5
Sending Documents
6
Sending a Job to a User Inbox
You can scan a document and store it in a User Inbox. If you include a User Inbox
as one of the destinations to which you are sending your document, the document
is stored in the selected User Inbox for later use. Documents stored in a User Inbox
can be printed and sent to other destinations. The following procedure explains how
to specify the document's name when you want to send it to a User Inbox.
IMPORTANT
• A document stored in a User Inbox is automatically erased after three days. However,
you can set the time that has to elapse before the documents in an inbox are
automatically erased. (See Chapter 6, "Customizing Settings," in the Mail Box Guide.)
• No more documents can be stored in a User Inbox if any of the following conditions are
true. (The numbers given below may vary depending on the remaining capacity of the
hard disk.)
- When 100 documents have been stored in the selected inbox
- When a total of 1,000 documents or images have been stored in all of the inboxes
- When a total of 3,700 pages of documents or images have been stored in all of the
inboxes
Sending Documents
5
NOTE
• It is recommended that you delete unwanted documents or image data from the inboxes
to make space for storing new documents.
• User Inboxes specified as destinations corresponds to the inboxes that appear on the
Inbox Selection screen for the Mail Box function.
• For more information on the User Inbox feature, see the Mail Box Guide.
1
5-28
Place your originals ➞ specify the desired User Inbox ➞ press
[Send Settings].
Sending Methods
NOTE
• For instructions on placing your originals, see "Placing Originals," on p. 1-35.
• For instructions on specifying a User Inbox as a destination, see "Specifying a User
Inbox," on p. 2-32.
• For instructions on specifying addresses and settings using the favorites buttons,
see "Using the Favorites Buttons," on p. 2-36.
• You can also set the scan mode for your documents. See "Selecting a Scan Mode,"
on p. 3-2.
2
Press [Send Doc. Name].
The document name set in [Send Doc. Name] corresponds to the name of the
document that appears for the Mail Box function.
3
Enter the name of the document that you want to send ➞
press [OK].
You can enter up to 24 characters for the document's name.
You can also use
clear your entry.
-
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to
Sending Methods
5-29
Sending Documents
5
NOTE
For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
4
Press [Done].
5
Sending Documents
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
5
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When
scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The document is stored in the selected User Inbox with the name that you
specified in step 3 when scanning is complete.
NOTE
If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
5-30
Sending Methods
Delaying a Send Job
The Delayed Send mode enables you to store a send job in memory, and have it
sent at a later time.
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination ➞ press [Send
Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Sending an E-Mail Message," on
p. 5-2.
NOTE
• For instructions on placing your originals, see "Placing Originals," on p. 1-35.
• For instructions on specifying addresses stored in the Address Book, see "Using
the Address Book," on p. 2-2.
• For instructions on specifying addresses not registered in the Address Book, see
"Using the New Address Tab," on p. 2-5.
• For instructions on specifying addresses using the one-touch buttons, see "Using
the One-Touch Buttons," on p. 2-34.
• For instructions on specifying addresses and settings using the favorites buttons,
see "Using the Favorites Buttons," on p. 2-36.
• For instructions on specifying a destination by searching through the directory
listings on a server on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol), see "Using a Server," on p. 2-38.
• You can also set the scan mode for your documents. See "Selecting a Scan Mode,"
on p. 3-2.
Sending Methods
5-31
5
Sending Documents
NOTE
• You can reserve up to 120 jobs for delayed sending. However, the actual number of jobs
that can be reserved may be less than 120, depending on the following conditions:
- If multiple documents are being sent at the same time
- If large documents are being sent
• The number of delayed send jobs could also be reduced if there are other jobs with no
Delayed Send settings, or it appends upon the other factors affecting the specified
destinations.
• Once the delayed documents are sent, the documents are automatically deleted from
memory.
• You can check the status, cancel, or change the destinations of documents for which a
preset send time has been specified. (See "Using the System Monitor Screen," on
p. 1-44, and Chapter 7, "Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status.")
2
Press [Delayed Send].
3
Enter the send time using
-
(numeric keys).
Sending Documents
5
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples:
7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you set a time earlier than the current time, the document will be sent at that
time on the next day.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the send time, press
entry.
4
Press [OK] ➞ [Done].
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
5-32
Sending Methods
(Clear) to clear your
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When
scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The document is stored in memory, and sent to the specified destination at the
specified time.
NOTE
• To cancel a delayed send job, press [Send Settings] ➞ [Delayed Send] ➞ [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
• You can also cancel a delayed send job from the System Monitor screen. (See
"Using the System Monitor Screen," on p. 1-44.)
5
Sending Documents
5
Sending Methods
5-33
Previewing Originals
This feature enables you to preview the scanned data of your originals before
sending it. You can verify the scanned data of your originals on the Preview screen.
NOTE
The default setting is Off.
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination ➞ press
[Preview].
Sending Documents
5
[Preview] is lit when it is on.
[Preview] is not lit when it is off.
The selected mode is set.
5-34
Previewing Originals
NOTE
• For instructions on placing your original, see "Placing Originals," on p. 1-35.
• For instructions on specifying addresses stored in the Address Book, see "Using
the Address Book," on p. 2-2.
• For instructions on specifying addresses not registered in the Address Book, see
"Using the New Address Tab," on p. 2-5.
• For instructions on specifying addresses using the one-touch buttons, see "Using
the One-Touch Buttons," on p. 2-34.
• For instructions on specifying addresses and settings using the favorites buttons,
see "Using the Favorites Buttons," on p. 2-36.
• For instructions on specifying a destination by searching through the directory
listings on a server on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol), see "Using a Server," on p. 2-38.
• You can also set the scan mode for your documents. See "Selecting a Scan Mode,"
on p. 3-2.
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When
scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The Preview screen is displayed when scanning is complete.
NOTE
If the Preview key is not lit, the Preview display setting is turned off, and the
Preview screen is not displayed. In this case, when scanning is complete, the
scanned data is sent to the specified destination.
▲
Press [ ] or [ ] to specify the page that you want to verify.
▲
3
Previewing Originals
5-35
5
Sending Documents
2
To preview a specific page number, enter the page number using
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK].
-
▲
▲
You can also press [ ] or [ ] to scroll through and preview the previous and
next pages of your document.
The image of the selected page is displayed on the Preview screen.
Sending Documents
5
4
Verify the images ➞ press [Start Send].
You can press [
] (reduce) or [
] (enlarge) to zoom in or out.
▲
▲
You can press [ ], [ ], [▼], or [▲] to specify the area to display when you zoom
in or out on the page.
When your image is enlarged or reduced, you can see the general location of
which area you are previewing with
(above the reduce and enlarge icons).
If you want to cancel the send job, press [Cancel].
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.
5-36
Previewing Originals
Job Done Notice
You can send a job done notice to a specified e-mail address to notify you when a
send job is complete.
IMPORTANT
To send a job done notice, you need to store e-mail addresses in the Address Book
beforehand. (See "Storing New Addresses," on p. 9-5.)
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination ➞ press [Job
Done Notice].
5
Sending Documents
1
NOTE
• For instructions on placing your original, see "Placing Originals," on p. 1-35.
• For instructions on specifying addresses stored in the Address Book, see "Using
the Address Book," on p. 2-2.
• For instructions on specifying addresses not registered in the Address Book, see
"Using the New Address Tab," on p. 2-5.
• For instructions on specifying addresses using the one-touch buttons, see "Using
the One-Touch Buttons," on p. 2-34.
• For instructions on specifying addresses and settings using the favorites buttons,
see "Using the Favorites Buttons," on p. 2-36.
• For instructions on specifying a destination by searching through the directory
listings on a server on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol), see "Using a Server," on p. 2-38.
• You can also set the scan mode for your documents. See "Selecting a Scan Mode,"
on p. 3-2.
Job Done Notice
5-37
2
Select the destination where the job done notice is to be sent.
● If Access Number Management is set to 'On', and you want to select
a destination that is stored with an access number or in a private
address book:
❑ Press [Access Number].
Sending Documents
5
❑ Enter the access number
-
(numeric keys) for the private address book
or destination ➞ press [OK].
If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with
the Access Number setting are displayed.
To cancel entering the Access Number, press [Cancel].
5-38
Job Done Notice
❑ Select the destination ➞ press [OK].
● If Access Number Management is set to 'Off', or the destination is
not stored with an access number or in a private address book:
❑ Select the destination ➞ press [OK].
Sending Documents
5
If the desired e-mail address is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll the
desired e-mail address.
Press the alphabet keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the range of entries. Press the
same key again to return to the full address list.
Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books
(subaddress books 1 to 10, or one-touch buttons). Subaddress books
categorize the addresses stored in the Address Book.
The selected destination where the job done notice is to be sent is set, and the
display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
Job Done Notice
5-39
NOTE
• You cannot select multiple destinations.
• To display [Access Number], set the Access Number Management to 'On'. To
access the Access Number Management setting, press
(Additional Functions)
➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Manage/Access to Address Book] ➞ [Access Number
Management]. (See "Manage/Access to Address Book," on p. 10-22.)
• To cancel a selected e-mail address, select the address again.
• To view the detailed information of a selected e-mail address, select the address ➞
press [Details].
3
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When
scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
5
Sending Documents
When the send job completes, a job done notice is sent to the specified e-mail
address.
NOTE
• To cancel this setting, press [Job Done Notice] ➞ [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the standard mode, press
(Reset).
5-40
Job Done Notice
Job Recall
You can recall the last three addresses, scan settings, and send settings which
have been set, and then send your documents.
NOTE
The three most recent settings that were stored in memory are not erased even when the
power is turned OFF.
1
Place your originals ➞ press [Recall].
NOTE
For instructions on placing your original, see "Placing Originals," on p. 1-35.
Job Recall
5-41
5
Sending Documents
IMPORTANT
• The machine considers any one of the following operations a send job:
- When settings, such as the destination, scan settings, and send settings, are specified,
and the control panel power switch,
(Energy Saver),
(Start), or
(Reset) is
pressed
- When the Auto Clear mode activates after the send settings are specified
• The Standard mode cannot be stored in memory.
• Identical send settings are stored only once in Recall memory.
• If Access Number Management is set to 'On', the Recall mode cannot be used.
2
Select [1 Before], [2 Before], or [3 Before] ➞ confirm the
settings ➞ press [OK].
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
5
Sending Documents
NOTE
• You can also check which send jobs are stored in memory other than the currently
displayed send job by pressing [▼] or [▲].
• You can change the settings in a recalled send job.
• If there are multiple destinations stored in Recall memory, the order of the
destinations shown in the list may not correspond to the order of their settings.
3
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press
(Start) once for each original. When
scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
NOTE
If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify
the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-34.)
5-42
Job Recall
Receiving Documents
6
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the basic reception features. You can receive document transmissions
automatically, forward received documents to a specified destination, or print a received
document from memory.
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Receiving Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Setting the Memory Lock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Memory RX Inbox Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Forwarding Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Erasing Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
Available Paper Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6-1
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
■ Receiving Print Jobs
The machine receives and prints print jobs sent from a computer.
■ Receiving I-Fax and Fax Documents
The I-fax function is similar to e-mail. However, instead of sending and receiving
messages over the Internet, I-fax enables you to send and receive scanned document
images via the Internet.
You can set the machine to automatically forward received I-fax documents to specified
destinations. For more information on specifying forwarding settings, see "Forwarding
Settings," on p. 10-26.
NOTE
• If files (images) that are attached to received I-fax documents and are not compatible
with this machine, the machine does not process (print, forward, or store) these files, but
erases them instead. The names of the erased files and the message <Could not create
image> are printed out with the text of the received I-fax.
• Sending by I-fax has the following limitations.
- Size is fixed to LTR. This is because the sender does not know whether the machine at
the destination can receive sizes other than LTR.
- Resolution is fixed to 200 x 200 dpi. (200 x 100 dpi also can be selected optionally.)
- Images can be sent only in monochrome. They are sent in TIFF-MH format.
• If you send by e-mail, the above-mentioned limitations do not apply. The image is sent as
a file attached to the e-mail.
- Sizes other than LTR can be selected.
- The resolution can be selected.
- Images can be sent in color also. Color images are sent in JPEG or PDF format, and
monochrome images are sent in TIFF-MMR format.
Receiving Documents
6
■ Receiving Fax Documents (if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed)
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, you can also receive the documents by
fax. You can automatically forward received fax documents to specified destinations. For
more information on receiving the document by fax, see Chapter 6, "Receiving
Documents," in the Facsimile Guide.
6-2
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
Receiving Documents
1
When documents are being received, the Processing/Data
indicator on the control panel flashes a green light.
ditional Functions PQRS
TUV
Processing
/ Data
WXYZ
Error
NOTE
During reception, the transaction number and information related to the sender are
displayed on the touch panel display.
2
When document reception is complete, the Processing/Data
indicator on the control panel maintains a steady green light.
This indicates that documents are stored in memory.
ditional Functions PQRS
TUV
Processing
/ Data
WXYZ
Error
NOTE
• The Processing/Data indicator flashes or maintains a steady green light even when
the machine enters the Sleep mode.
• The Error indicator flashes when either the amount of available memory is low or
paper needs to be loaded into a paper drawer.
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
6-3
Receiving Documents
6
3
The document is printed.
The Processing/Data indicator goes out when documents stored in memory are
printed.
NOTE
• If there is no paper on which the received documents can be printed, the received
documents are stored in memory.
• The memory can hold a total of approximately 3,700 pages for sending and
receiving documents.
• Documents stored in memory because the paper has run out, are automatically
printed when paper is loaded into a paper drawer.
• If a printing error occurs, the Error indicator flashes a red light.
Setting the Memory Lock Mode
You can set to store the received I-fax documents in the Memory RX Inbox without
being printed. After verifying the documents on the Memory RX Inbox screen, you
can print or send them whenever necessary.
If you set Use I-Fax Memory Lock to 'On', you can turn I-Fax Memory Lock for
documents sent to the Memory RX Inbox 'On' or 'Off' as necessary. If I-Fax Memory
Lock is set to 'On', received documents are stored in the Memory RX Inbox instead
of being printed. (See Chapter 4, "Storing Received Documents," in the Mail Box
Guide.)
Receiving Documents
6
IMPORTANT
Documents cannot be received in memory in the following cases: (The actual numbers
may be less than that given below, depending on the conditions under which the hard
disk is used.)
- When a total of 1,000 documents or images have been stored in all the inboxes
- When a total of 3,700 pages of documents or images have been stored in all the
inboxes
NOTE
To receive documents in memory, you must first set Use I-Fax Memory Lock to 'On'. (See
"Storing Received I-Fax Documents in Memory," on p. 10-13.)
6-4
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
Memory RX Inbox Settings
There may be occasions when you want the I-fax to store all incoming documents
in memory until you are ready to print or send them. Locking the I-fax to receive and
store all documents in memory is called Memory Lock.
After the memory lock is turned 'On', the I-fax will automatically enter and leave the
Memory Lock mode at the times you specify. The documents received when the
I-fax is in Memory Lock mode are stored in memory until you unlock the memory
with a password and print or send them.
Follow the procedures that follow to define a memory lock password and set the
times for the I-fax to enter and leave the Memory Lock mode.
Setting the Memory RX Inbox Password
You can set the Memory RX (Receive) Inbox with a seven digit password and
restrict its use to those users who know the password.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(ID).
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
6
Receiving Documents
NOTE
You can enter up to seven digits for the password. If you enter fewer than seven digits,
the machine stores the password with leading zeros.
- Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
6-5
2
Press [Communications Settings].
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
3
Press [Memory RX Inbox Settings].
Receiving Documents
6
6-6
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
4
5
Press [Memory RX Inbox Password].
Enter the desired password using
press [OK].
-
(numeric keys) ➞
Receiving Documents
6
If you do not want to set the Memory RX Inbox with a password, do not enter any
number.
You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the password, press
entry.
6
(Clear) to clear your
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
6-7
Storing Received I-Fax Documents in Memory
You can set the machine to store documents received by I-fax into memory without
printing them. This is referred to as Memory Lock. You can later check the received
documents in the Memory RX Inbox and print or send them.
NOTE
The default setting is 'Off'.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Communications Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Setting the Memory RX
Inbox Password," on p. 6-5.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
Receiving Documents
6
2
6-8
Press [Memory RX Inbox Settings] ➞ [Use I-Fax Memory
Lock].
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
3
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
The selected mode is set.
IMPORTANT
If the message <I-Fax Memory RX is on.> does not appear, set the I-Fax Memory
Lock setting on the Memory RX Inbox screen to 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Storing
Received Documents," in the Mail Box Guide.)
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Memory Lock Start Time Settings
You can set Memory Lock to start automatically at a specified time.
NOTE
The default setting is 'Off'.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Communications Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Setting the Memory RX
Inbox Password," on p. 6-5.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
6-9
Receiving Documents
6
2
3
Press [Memory RX Inbox Settings] ➞ [Memory Lock Start
Time].
Select [Everyday], [Select Days], or [Off].
Receiving Documents
6
6-10
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
● If you select [Everyday]:
❑ Select a number ([1] to [5]) ➞ enter the start time using
-
(numeric keys)
➞ press [OK].
You can store up to five different start times.
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples:
7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
If you make a mistake when entering the time, enter another four digit number.
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the time, you can press
your entry.
(Clear) to clear
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
6-11
Receiving Documents
6
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
● If you select [Select Days]:
❑ Select a day ([Sun] to [Sat]) ➞ select a number ([1] to [5]).
❑ Enter the start time using
-
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK].
You can store up to five different start times.
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples:
7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
6
Receiving Documents
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you make a mistake when entering the time, enter another four digit number.
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the time, you can press
your entry.
6-12
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
(Clear) to clear
● If you select [Off]:
❑ Press [OK].
If you select [Off], Memory Lock is not automatically turned 'On' at a specified
time. You can turn Memory Lock 'On' or 'Off' manually using the I-Fax Memory
Lock setting on the Memory RX Inbox screen. (See Chapter 4, "Storing
Received Documents," in the Mail Box Guide.)
The selected mode is set.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
6-13
Receiving Documents
6
NOTE
You can select [Everyday] for Memory Lock Start Time, and [Select Days] for
Memory Lock End Time, and vice versa.
Memory Lock End Time Settings
You can set Memory Lock to end automatically at a specified time.
NOTE
The default setting is 'Off'.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Communications Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Setting the Memory RX
Inbox Password," on p. 6-5.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
6
Receiving Documents
2
6-14
Press [Memory RX Inbox Settings] ➞ [Memory Lock End
Time].
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
3
Select [Everyday], [Select Days], or [Off].
● If you select [Everyday]:
❑ Select a number ([1] to [5]) ➞ enter the end time using
-
(numeric keys)
➞ press [OK].
Receiving Documents
6
You can store up to five different end times.
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples:
7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you make a mistake when entering the time, enter another four digit number.
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the time, you can press
your entry.
(Clear) to clear
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
6-15
● If you select [Select Days]:
❑ Select a day ([Sun] to [Sat]) ➞ select a number ([1] to [5]).
❑ Enter the end time using
-
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK].
You can store up to five different end times.
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples:
7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
6
Receiving Documents
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you make a mistake when entering the time, enter another four digit number.
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the time, you can press
your entry.
6-16
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
(Clear) to clear
● If you select [Off]:
❑ Press [OK].
If you select [Off], Memory Lock is not automatically turned 'Off' at a specified
time. You can turn Memory Lock 'On' or 'Off' manually using the I-Fax Memory
Lock setting on the Memory RX Inbox screen. (See Chapter 4, "Storing
Received Documents," in the Mail Box Guide.)
The selected mode is set.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
6-17
Receiving Documents
6
NOTE
You can select [Everyday] for Memory Lock Start Time, and [Select Days] for
Memory Lock End Time, and vice versa.
Forwarding Received Documents
If you receive an I-fax document, and it conforms to the specified forwarding
conditions, the document is automatically forwarded to the specified destination.
You can register the forwarding conditions and destinations in Forwarding Settings
in System Setting (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Forwarding
Settings," on p. 10-26.)
NOTE
To be able to forward received documents, you must first set Validate/Invalidate to 'On' in
Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See
"Forwarding Settings," on p. 10-26.)
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Setting the Memory RX Inbox
Password," on p. 6-5.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(ID).
Receiving Documents
6
2
Press [Forwarding Settings].
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
6-18
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
Select the desired forwarding setting ➞ press [Validate/
Invalidate].
[Validate]:
The received document is forwarded to the specified destination if
it matches the forwarding conditions.
[Invalidate]:
The received document is not forwarded to the specified
destination even if it matches the forwarding conditions.
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
To cancel forwarding, press [Validate/Invalidate] again.
The selected forwarding setting is enabled.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Erasing Received Documents
You can erase any received document stored in the Memory RX Inboxes or the
Confidential Fax Inboxes when the memory is full.
NOTE
The memory is full when either of the following is true: (The actual numbers may be less
than that given below, depending on the conditions under which the hard disk is used.)
- When a total of 1,000 documents or images have been stored in all the inboxes
- When a total of 3,700 pages of documents or images have been stored in all the
inboxes
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
6-19
6
Receiving Documents
3
1
Press [Mail Box].
2
Select [Memory RX Inbox] or [Conf. Fax Inbox].
Receiving Documents
6
[Memory RX Inbox]: To select a received document that has been stored in the
Memory RX Inbox.
[Conf. Fax Inbox]:
6-20
To select a received document that has been forwarded to
the Confidential Fax Inbox.
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
Select the desired inbox ➞ select the document that you want
to erase ➞ press [Erase].
In the example above, [Memory RX Inbox] in Memory RX Inbox is selected.
Memory RX Inbox contains only one inbox.
If the desired inbox is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
inbox.
If you enter the User Inbox number using
enter a 2-digit number ➞ press [OK].
-
(numeric keys), make sure to
If you make a mistake when entering the User Inbox number, press
enter the correct number.
(Clear) ➞
If the selected inbox is set with a password, enter the password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK].
-
If there are more than seven stored documents, press [▼] or [▲] to display the
other documents.
You can only select one document to erase at a time.
NOTE
• You can cancel a selection by pressing the document again.
• If a document is stored in an inbox, that inbox is displayed with the
icon.
• If an inbox is set with a password, a locked mark ( ) is displayed next to the icon
of that inbox.
• If you make a mistake when selecting an inbox, press [Done] ➞ select the correct
inbox.
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
6-21
6
Receiving Documents
3
4
Press [Yes].
To cancel erasing the selected document, press [No].
The message <Erased.> appears for approximately two seconds on the touch
panel display.
The selected document is erased.
6
Receiving Documents
5
Press [Done].
The display returns to the Inbox Selection screen.
6
Press [Send].
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
6-22
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
Available Paper Sizes
When received documents are printed, they are printed from the paper drawer that
has the same size paper as the received document. If paper of the correct size is
not available, the machine automatically selects a different paper size in the
following order. The paper size is automatically selected in the same order, even if
paper runs out during printing.
■ Available Paper Sizes for Received Documents
11" x 17" ➞ LGL* ➞ STMT x 2
LGL originals
LGL ➞ LTR x 2 ➞ STMT x 2 ➞ 11" x 17"
LTR originals
LTR ➞ LGL ➞ STMT x 2 ➞ 11" x 17"
STMT originals
STMT ➞ LTR ➞ LGL ➞ 11" x 17"
*Received documents are automatically reduced before being printed on the paper size indicated.
6
IMPORTANT
Received documents can be printed on the following paper sizes and paper types:
Paper Sizes: 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, or STMTR
Paper Types: plain, recycled, or color
NOTE
• You can specify each paper drawer for the I-fax function. The default setting is 'On',
except for the stack bypass. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference
Guide.)
• You can set the machine to reduce received documents to 75%, 90%, 95%, or 97% if the
document is larger than any of the available paper sizes. (See "Reducing a Received
Document," on p. 8-42.)
• You can change the order of paper selection. (See "Paper Drawer Selection," on p. 8-39.)
• You can set the machine to print received documents on both sides of the paper. (See
"Two-Sided Printing," on p. 8-37.)
• Received documents are output face down, in the order in which the pages are received.
Available Paper Sizes
6-23
Receiving Documents
11" x 17" originals
Receiving Documents
6
6-24
Available Paper Sizes
Checking/Changing
the Send/Receive Status
7
CHAPTER
This chapter describes how you can check/change the status of send and receive jobs.
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Checking Send Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Changing the Destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Resending a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
Printing the Send Job Status/Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Checking/Changing the Status of Receive Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Checking Receive Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Printing the Receive Job Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Checking the Arrival of an I-Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
Checking the Status of Jobs That Have Been Forwarded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22
7-1
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
This section describes how to check/change the status of send jobs. For more
information, see Chapter 5, "Checking Job and Device Status," in the Reference
Guide.
NOTE
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, fax jobs can also be checked/changed in
the same way. (See Chapter 8, "Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status," in the
Facsimile Guide.)
• The maximum number of jobs that are displayed are:
- Job status screen: 120 jobs
- Job log screen:
100 jobs
Checking Send Job Details
You can check detailed information on any send job, such as the destination and
the date and time the job was specified.
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
7
1
7-2
Press [System Monitor].
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
Press [Send].
3
Select [Status] or [Log].
7
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
2
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
7-3
4
Select a job whose detailed information you want to check ➞
press [Details].
If the job that you want to select is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲]to scroll to the
job.
NOTE
• If Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off' when multiple
destinations are selected for a send job, <Finished.> is displayed for those
destinations to which the job was sent successfully, and <Error> is displayed for
those destinations that had transmission errors. When multiple destinations are
simultaneously specified for a send job, and you select and cancel the transmission
to any one of those destinations, or the retransmission of an error job or an
interrupted job is completed successfully, information on all of those
simultaneously specified destinations is displayed in the log.
• To access the Erase Failed TX setting, press
(Additional Functions) ➞
[Communications Settings] ➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [Erase
Failed TX].
• If you send documents using the Full mode to a machine that does not support the
Full mode, delivery confirmation cannot be carried out. When this happens, the job
concerned is not considered as complete even though the actual sending of the
document is successful. Such jobs are displayed as <Waiting for result...> on the
Status screen until the time set for Full Mode TX Timeout in E-mail/I-Fax Settings in
Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) has lapsed. After the timeout, the job is moved to the log, and the result is
shown as <->.
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
7
7-4
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
● If you select a job with only one destination in [Status]:
❑ Check the details.
To change the destination, press [Change Destination]. (See "Changing the
Destination," on p. 7-7.)
To resend the job, press [Resend]. (See "Resending a Job," on p. 7-11.)
● If you select a job with multiple destinations in [Status]:
❑ Check the details.
❑ Press [Broadcast List].
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
7
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
7-5
❑ Check the status for each destination.
To change the destination, press [Change Destination]. (See "Changing the
Destination," on p. 7-7.)
To resend the job, press [Resend]. (See "Resending a Job," on p. 7-11.)
If the destination that you want to check is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to
scroll to the destination.
● If you select a job in [Log]:
❑ Check the details.
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
7
5
7-6
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
Changing the Destination
You can change the destination of a send job from the System Monitor screen.
IMPORTANT
• You can only change the destination for send jobs that have been canceled due to a
transmission error or jobs that have been set with the Delayed Send mode and are still
waiting in the send queue.
• To be able to change the destination for send jobs that have been canceled due to a
transmission error, you must first set Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common
Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'.
(See "Automatic Document Deletion," on p. 8-4.)
• You cannot change more than one destination at the same time. You also cannot change
the destination of a whole group at once.
• You cannot change the destination of a send job if another job with the same job number
is being sent or is waiting in the send queue. This restriction does not apply to Delayed
Send jobs.
• If the total number of destinations, including the destinations specified by the Address
Book and one-touch buttons that have been changed, and new destinations or
destinations specified by a server, has reached 64, you can no longer change the
destinations that have been specified by the Address Book or one-touch buttons.
1
Press [System Monitor] ➞ [Send].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Checking Send Job
Details," on p. 7-2.
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
7-7
7
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
NOTE
• You cannot change the destination type. For example, you cannot change the destination
of a job from an e-mail address to an I-Fax address.
• If a job is specified to be stored in a User Inbox, you cannot change the inbox in which to
store the job.
2
3
Press [Status].
Select the job whose destination you want to change ➞ press
[Details].
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
7
If the job that you want to select is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
job.
7-8
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
4
Select the destination that you want to change.
● If there is only one destination:
❑ Press [Change Destination].
● If there are multiple destinations:
❑ Press [Broadcast List].
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
7
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
7-9
❑ Select the destination that you want to change ➞ press [Change Destination].
If the destination that you want to select is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to
scroll to the destination.
5
Change the destination.
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
7
The types of destinations and the settings that you can change are:
- E-mail:
- I-Fax:
- File:
E-mail Address
I-Fax Address, Mode, Send Via Server (On/Off)
Host Name, File Path, User, Password
NOTE
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, you can also change fax numbers.
7-10
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
6
Press [OK].
The job is sent to the specified destination.
7
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Resending a Job
IMPORTANT
To be able to resend jobs that have been canceled due to a transmission error, you must
first set Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See "Automatic Document
Deletion," on p. 8-4.)
1
Press [System Monitor] ➞ [Send].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Checking Send Job
Details," on p. 7-2.
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
7-11
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
7
You can resend jobs that are canceled due to transmission errors.
2
Press [Status].
3
Select the job that you want to resend ➞ press [Details].
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
7
If the job that you want to select is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
job.
7-12
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
4
Select the destination to resend the job to.
● If there is only one destination:
❑ Press [Resend].
● If there are multiple destinations for same sending method:
❑ Press [Broadcast List].
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
7
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
7-13
❑ Select the destination to resend the job to ➞ press [Resend].
If the destination that you want to select is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to
scroll to the destination.
The job is sent to the specified destination.
5
Printing the Send Job Status/Log
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
7
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
1
Press [System Monitor] ➞ [Send].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Checking Send Job
Details," on p. 7-2.
7-14
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
3
Select [Status] or [Log].
[Status]:
Press this key if you want to print the send job list (TX Reserve List).
[Log]:
Press this key if you want to print the send job log (Activity Report).
Press [Print List].
7
NOTE
• The icons that are displayed on the left side of the list are explained below:
: A job for which an Activity Report has already been printed.
: A job for which an Activity Report has not yet been printed.
• The send job status/log can be printed only if 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR (plain,
recycled, or color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in Other in
Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) are set to 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference
Guide.)
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
7-15
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
2
4
Press [Yes].
To cancel printing, press [No].
If you selected [Status], the TX Reserve List is printed. If you selected [Log], the
Activity Report (TX) is printed.
5
Press [Done].
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
7
7-16
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
Checking/Changing the Status of Receive Jobs
You can check the contents of received documents stored in memory as well as the
status of forwarding jobs and documents received through I-fax.
NOTE
The receive job log (Activity Report (RX)) screen displays up to a maximum of 100 jobs.
Checking Receive Job Details
You can check detailed information on any received job, such as the destination
and the date and time the job was received.
Press [System Monitor].
7
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
1
Checking/Changing the Status of Receive Jobs
7-17
2
3
Press [Receive].
Select a job whose detailed information you want to check ➞
press [Details].
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
7
If the job that you want to select is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
job.
7-18
Checking/Changing the Status of Receive Jobs
4
5
Check the details of the selected job.
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Printing the Receive Job Log
You can print the receive job log (Activity Report (RX)).
1
Press [System Monitor] ➞ [Receive].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Checking Receive Job
Details," on p. 7-17.
Checking/Changing the Status of Receive Jobs
7-19
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
7
2
Press [Print List].
NOTE
• The icons that are displayed on the left side of the list are explained below:
: A job for which an Activity Report has already been printed.
: A job for which an Activity Report has not yet been printed.
• The receive job log can be printed only if 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR (plain,
recycled, or color paper only) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in
Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) are set to 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the
Reference Guide.)
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
7
3
Press [Yes].
To cancel printing, press [No].
The Activity Report (RX) is printed.
7-20
Checking/Changing the Status of Receive Jobs
4
Press [Done].
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
Checking the Arrival of an I-Fax
The machine regularly checks for the arrival of an I-fax. However, you can check for
the arrival of an I-fax at any time by performing the procedure below.
1
Press [System Monitor] ➞ [Receive].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Checking Receive Job
Details," on p. 7-17.
Press [Checking RX of I-Fax Jobs].
7
The screen below is displayed while the machine is checking for the arrival of an
I-fax.
Checking/Changing the Status of Receive Jobs
7-21
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
2
NOTE
To be able to use [Checking RX of I-Fax Jobs], you must first set the POP setting in
E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) to 'On' so that you can receive documents using POP. (See Chapter 3,
"Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.)
3
Press [Done].
The display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.
Checking the Status of Jobs That Have Been Forwarded
You can check the details of jobs that have been forwarded, depending on the
forwarding settings.
1
Press [System Monitor] ➞ [Receive].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Checking Receive Job
Details," on p. 7-17.
2
Press [Forwarding Status].
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
7
7-22
Checking/Changing the Status of Receive Jobs
3
Select a job whose detailed information you want to check ➞
press [Details].
If the job that you want to select is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
job.
NOTE
If 120 send jobs have accumulated on the job status screen, jobs that are waiting to
be forwarded are displayed on the Forwarding Status screen.
5
7
Check the details of the selected job.
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Checking/Changing the Status of Receive Jobs
7-23
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
4
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
7
7-24
Checking/Changing the Status of Receive Jobs
Customizing
Communications Settings
8
CHAPTER
This chapter describes how to store and change the default settings of the Send/Receive
function to suit your needs.
Communications Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Automatic Document Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
JPEG Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Handling Documents That Fail to Be Forwarded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Number of Retry Attempts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Standard Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Favorites Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Registering a Favorites Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Naming a Favorites Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Erasing a Favorites Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
PDF Compression Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Initial Send Screen Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Printing the TX Terminal ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Gamma Value for Color Send Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Initializing TX Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Two-Sided Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Paper Drawer Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Reducing a Received Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Printing Footer Information on a Received Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
2 On 1 Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
8-1
Communications Settings Table
The following items can be stored or set in Communications Settings, from the
Additional Functions screen.
Customizing Communications Settings
■ Common Settings
Item
Settings
Applicable
Page
TX Settings
8
Sender's Names (TTI)
01 to 99: Register/Edit, Erase
p. 1-16
Unit Name
24 characters maximum.
p. 1-19
Erase Failed TX
On*, Off
p. 8-4
JPEG Compression Ratio
High Ratio, Normal*, Low Ratio
p. 8-6
Handle Documents with
Forwarding Errors
Always Print, Store/Print, Off*
p. 8-8
Retry Times
0-5 times; 3 times*
p. 8-10
Edit Standard Send Settings
Scanning Mode, File Format
p. 8-12
Register Favorites Button
Register/Edit, Erase: M1 to M9
p. 8-15
Image Level for PDF (Compct)
Data Size Priority, Normal*, Image
Priority
Image Level in Text Mode:
Data Size Priority, Normal*, Image
Priority
p. 8-23
Default Screen for Send
Favorites Buttons, One-touch Buttons,
New Address*
p. 8-26
TX Terminal ID
On*, Off
p. 8-28
Gamma Value for Color Send
Jobs
Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4,
Gamma 1.8*, Gamma 2.2
p. 8-33
Initialize TX Settings
Initialize
p. 8-35
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
8-2
Communications Settings Table
■ Common Settings Table Continued
Item
Settings
Applicable
Page
RX Settings
Two-sided Print
On, Off*
p. 8-37
Switch A: On*, Off
Switch B: On*, Off
Switch C: On*, Off
p. 8-39
Switch D: On*, Off
Receive Reduction
On*, Off
p. 8-42
Received Page Footer
On, Off*
p. 8-46
2 On 1 Log
On, Off*
p. 8-48
An asterisk (*) indicates the default settings.
NOTE
For instructions on how to set the modes not described in this manual, refer to the other
manuals listed in the front of this Sending Guide. (See "Manuals for the Machine," on
p. ii.)
Customizing Communications Settings
Select Cassette
8
Communications Settings Table
8-3
Automatic Document Deletion
If transmission of a document has failed, this mode automatically erases that
document from memory.
Customizing Communications Settings
NOTE
The default setting is 'On'.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications
Settings].
8
2
8-4
Press [TX Settings] under <Common Settings>.
Automatic Document Deletion
Press [Erase Failed TX].
Customizing Communications Settings
3
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
4
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
8
[On]:
Erases jobs after sending, whether the transmission ends successfully or
with an error.
[Off]:
Stores a job in memory if the transmission ends in an error.
On the System Monitor screen, you can resend jobs whose transmissions have
failed or change the destinations and resend the jobs. (See "Changing the
Destination," on p. 7-7 or "Resending a Job," on p. 7-11.)
The selected mode is set.
5
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Automatic Document Deletion
8-5
JPEG Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs
Customizing Communications Settings
You can set the compression ratio for color scanned data. A high compression ratio
reduces the amount of memory used for the document, but results in low quality
images. On the contrary, a low compression ratio increases the amount of memory
used for the document, but results in high quality images.
NOTE
• If [PDF (Compct)] is selected as the File Format, set JPEG Compression Ratio in TX
Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) to 'Normal' or 'Low Ratio'. If the JPEG Compression Ratio is set to
'High Ratio', the images output may be of a low quality even if [Image Priority] is selected
in Image Level for PDF (Compct) in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in
Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, and you are sending documents by fax,
this setting is disabled.
• The default setting is 'Normal'.
1
8
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications
Settings] ➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Automatic Document
Deletion," on p. 8-4.
2
8-6
Press [JPEG Compression Ratio].
JPEG Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
Select [High Ratio], [Normal], or [Low Ratio] ➞ press [OK].
[High Ratio]:
A small amount of memory is used for the document, but the
images are of a low quality.
[Normal]:
The amount of memory used for the document and the quality of
the images are moderate, between [High Ratio] and [Low Ratio].
[Low Ratio]:
A large amount of memory is used for the document, but the
images are of a high quality.
8
The selected mode is set.
4
Customizing Communications Settings
3
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
JPEG Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs
8-7
Handling Documents That Fail to Be Forwarded
You can set how the machine handles the documents that fail to be forwarded.
Customizing Communications Settings
NOTE
• The default setting is 'Off'.
• If Erase Failed TX is set to 'Off' in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in
Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the status of any job
with a forwarding error will be saved on the System Monitor screen. The document will
not be processed according to the settings you make for Handle Documents with
Forwarding Errors. (See "Automatic Document Deletion," on p. 8-4.)
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications
Settings] ➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Automatic Document
Deletion," on p. 8-4.
2
8
8-8
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Handle Documents with Forwarding
Errors] appears ➞ press [Handle Documents with Forwarding
Errors].
Handling Documents That Fail to Be Forwarded
Select [Always Print], [Store/Print], or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
[Always Print]:
Documents that fail to be forwarded are printed.
[Store/Print]:
Documents that fail to be forwarded are stored in the Memory
RX Inbox. The machine automatically prints out the documents
that fail to be forwarded if Use I-Fax Memory Lock is set to 'Off'.
To access Use I-Fax Memory Lock, press
(Additional
Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Communications settings]
➞ [Memory RX Inbox Settings] ➞ [Use I-Fax Memory Lock].
[Off]:
Documents that fail to be forwarded are not printed.
The selected mode is set.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Handling Documents That Fail to Be Forwarded
8-9
Customizing Communications Settings
3
8
Number of Retry Attempts
Customizing Communications Settings
Retry Times is the mode which automatically resends data when the data cannot
be sent. This occurs because the receiver is busy sending or receiving, or when an
error occurs. This setting determines the number of retry attempts. You can set from
one to five retry attempts, or select '0' to turn the Retry Times mode 'Off'.
NOTE
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, and you are sending documents by fax,
this setting is disabled.
• The default setting is '3' times.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications
Settings] ➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Automatic Document
Deletion," on p. 8-4.
2
8
8-10
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Retry Times] appears ➞ press [Retry
Times].
Number of Retry Attempts
Press [-] or [+] to set the number of Retry Times ➞ press [OK].
If the number of retry times is set to '0', the machine will not resend the data
which cannot be sent.
NOTE
• You can also use
(numeric keys), and
(Clear) to clear your entries.
• You can change the value by pressing [-] or [+], even if you have entered the value
using
(numeric keys).
• If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an
appropriate value appears on the screen.
The selected mode is set.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Number of Retry Attempts
8-11
Customizing Communications Settings
3
8
Standard Send Settings
Customizing Communications Settings
This mode enables you to change the standard settings for the Send function,
including the scan mode and the file format. (See "Selecting a Scan Mode," on
p. 3-2, and "Sending Methods," on p. 5-2.)
NOTE
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, and you are sending documents by fax,
the file format set here is disabled.
• The default settings are:
- Scanning Mode: ACS 200x200 dpi
- File Format:
TIFF/JPEG
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications
Settings] ➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Automatic Document
Deletion," on p. 8-4.
2
8
8-12
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Edit Standard Send Settings] appears
➞ press [Edit Standard Send Settings].
Standard Send Settings
Press the Scanning Mode drop-down list ➞ select a scan
mode.
If the desired scan mode is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired scan mode.
You can also select a scan mode that you have already stored. (See "User Preset
Keys," on p. 4-34.)
4
Press the File Format drop-down list ➞ select a file format ➞
press [OK].
Customizing Communications Settings
3
8
File Formats:
[TIFF/JPEG]:
Sends images in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or JPEG
(Grayscale/Color) format.
[MTIFF/PDF]:
Enables you to insert multiple images into a single MTIFF or
PDF file. Sends the file in either the MTIFF (Black-and-White)
or PDF (Grayscale/Color) format.
[PDF/PDF]:
Enables you to insert multiple images into a single PDF file.
Sends the file in the PDF format regardless of the color mode.
Standard Send Settings
8-13
[PDF (Compct)]: Enables you to send files containing text originals or text/photo
originals using a high compression ratio. You can also send
multiple images together as one PDF file.
The Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Black-and-White) and
Black-and-White color modes cannot be set together.
If you select [PDF (Compct)] as the file format, it is
recommended that you set the original type setting to either
'Text/Photo' or 'Text', depending on the image type.
The selected mode is set.
Customizing Communications Settings
IMPORTANT
If [PDF (Compct)] is selected as the File Format, the resolution is automatically
changed to [300x300 dpi]. If the color mode is set to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/
Black-and-White)] or [Black and White], the color mode is automatically changed to
[Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale)] or [Grayscale] respectively. If you want to
send the document with the resolution setting and the color mode that you specify,
change the File Format setting to anything other than [PDF (Compct)].
NOTE
• In order to view a JPEG file, a software application that supports the JPEG file
format is required.
• In order to view a TIFF or MTIFF file, a software application that supports TIFF or
MTIFF file formats (such as Imaging for Windows) is required.
• In order to view a PDF file, Adobe Acrobat Reader is required.
• For more information on the different file formats, see "File Formats," in the
Glossary, on p. 13-12.
• If [PDF (Compct)] is selected as the File Format, set the JPEG Compression Ratio
in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) to 'Normal' or 'Low Ratio'. If the JPEG Compression
Ratio is set to 'High Ratio', the image output may be of a low quality even if [Image
Priority] is selected in Image Level for PDF (Compct) in TX Settings under
<Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen). (See "JPEG Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs," on p. 8-6.)
8
5
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
NOTE
To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
8-14
Standard Send Settings
Favorites Buttons
NOTE
• The send settings registered as favorites buttons in memory are not erased, even if you
turn the machine's power OFF.
• If an address included in a favorites button is deleted from the Address Book, it is also
deleted from the settings registered in the favorites button.
Registering a Favorites Button
1
Specify the send settings that you want to register.
Customizing Communications Settings
You can set any possible combination of send settings and register them in a
favorites button in memory. There are nine favorites buttons and they can be
assigned names for increased convenience. This feature is useful for registering
frequently used send settings.
8
NOTE
In the example above, the destination is specified, and the Two-sided Original
mode and Job Done Notice are set. Two-sided scanning is available only if the
optional Feeder (DADF-K1) is attached.
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications
Settings] ➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Automatic Document
Deletion," on p. 8-4.
Favorites Buttons
8-15
Customizing Communications Settings
3
4
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Register Favorites Button] appears ➞
press [Register Favorites Button].
Select a Favorites Button ([M1] to [M9]) for registering the
send settings ➞ press [Register/Edit].
8
NOTE
Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle
( ) in the lower right corner of the key.
8-16
Favorites Buttons
Press [Store].
NOTE
• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
• If there are more stored send settings than are currently displayed, you can scroll
through the list by pressing [▼] or [▲].
● If you select a key without settings:
❑ A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to store the settings. Press
[Yes].
Customizing Communications Settings
5
8
To cancel storing the settings, press [No].
Once the settings are stored, the message <Stored in memory.> appears for
approximately two seconds on the touch panel display.
The stored settings are displayed.
Favorites Buttons
8-17
● If you select a key that already has settings stored in it:
❑ A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to overwrite the previous
Customizing Communications Settings
settings. Press [Yes].
To cancel storing the settings, press [No].
Once the settings are stored, the message <Stored in memory.> appears for
approximately two seconds on the touch panel display.
The stored settings are displayed.
6
8
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
NOTE
You can also assign a name to a favorites button by pressing [Name].
Naming a Favorites Button
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications
Settings] ➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Automatic Document
Deletion," on p. 8-4.
2
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Register Favorites Button] appears ➞
press [Register Favorites Button].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 3 of "Registering a Favorites Button," on
p. 8-15.
8-18
Favorites Buttons
Select a Favorites Button ([M1] to [M9]) to name ➞ press
[Register/Edit].
NOTE
Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle
( ) in the lower right corner of the key.
4
Press [Name].
Customizing Communications Settings
3
8
NOTE
• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
• You can also assign names to keys with no settings stored in them.
• If there are more stored send settings than are currently displayed, you can scroll
through the list by pressing [▼] or [▲].
Favorites Buttons
8-19
Customizing Communications Settings
5
Enter a name ➞ press [OK].
Two lines can be used for a favorites button key name.
You can enter up to 10 characters per line.
The assigned name appears on the key.
NOTE
• For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• If you press [OK] without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its
current name (default M1 to M9).
6
8
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Erasing a Favorites Button
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications
Settings] ➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Automatic Document
Deletion," on p. 8-4.
2
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Register Favorites Button] appears ➞
press [Register Favorites Button].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 3 of "Registering a Favorites Button," on
p. 8-15.
8-20
Favorites Buttons
Select the Favorites Button with the send settings that you
want to erase ➞ press [Erase].
A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to erase the settings.
IMPORTANT
Make sure to check the settings before erasing them.
NOTE
• Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle
( ) in the lower right corner of the key.
• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
• If there are more stored send settings than are currently displayed, you can scroll
through the list by pressing [▼] or [▲].
4
Press [Yes].
To cancel erasing the settings, press [No].
Favorites Buttons
8-21
Customizing Communications Settings
3
8
Customizing Communications Settings
The message <Erased.> appears for approximately two seconds on the touch
panel display.
The stored send settings are erased.
NOTE
Key names are not erased. For instructions on changing a key name, see "Naming
a Favorites Button," on p. 8-18.
5
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
8
8-22
Favorites Buttons
PDF Compression Priority
NOTE
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, and you are sending documents by fax,
this setting is disabled.
• The default setting is 'Normal'.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications
Settings] ➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Automatic Document
Deletion," on p. 8-4.
2
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Image Level for PDF (Compct)] appears
➞ press [Image Level for PDF (Compct)].
Customizing Communications Settings
If PDF (Compct) is selected as the File Format, you can set the image quality level
of the document.
8
PDF Compression Priority
8-23
Customizing Communications Settings
3
Select [Data Size Priority], [Normal], or [Image Priority].
Image level when the Text/Photo or
Photo mode is selected.
4
[Data Size Priority]:
The data size is small, but the image quality is low.
[Normal]:
The data size and image quality are between the Data Size
Priority and Image Priority settings.
[Image Priority]:
The data size is large, but the image quality is high.
Select [Data Size Priority], [Normal], or [Image Priority] for
<Image Level in Text Mode> ➞ press [OK].
8
[Data Size Priority]:
The data size is small, but the image quality is low.
[Normal]:
The data size and image quality are between the Data Size
Priority and Image Priority settings.
[Image Priority]:
The data size is large, but the image quality is high.
The settings made for Image level in Text Mode are activated only if the Text
mode is selected for the Original Type.
The selected mode is set.
8-24
PDF Compression Priority
NOTE
If an original with many colors is scanned, the compression level is determined by
taking into consideration the data size and the number of colors, according to the
selected image level. However, if the original is in monochrome or has few colors, it
does not matter which image level you select.
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Customizing Communications Settings
5
8
PDF Compression Priority
8-25
Initial Send Screen Display
Customizing Communications Settings
This mode enables you to set whether the [Favorites Buttons], [One-touch Buttons],
or [New Address] tabs will be displayed on the initial Send Basic Features screen
when the power is turned ON, or the Auto Clear mode is activated.
NOTE
The default setting is 'New Address'.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications
Settings] ➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Automatic Document
Deletion," on p. 8-4.
2
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Default Screen for Send] appears ➞
press [Default Screen for Send].
8
8-26
Initial Send Screen Display
Select [Favorites Buttons], [One-touch Buttons], or [New
Address] ➞ press [OK].
The selected mode is set.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Customizing Communications Settings
3
8
Initial Send Screen Display
8-27
Printing the TX Terminal ID
Customizing Communications Settings
The TX Terminal ID setting enables you to specify whether the Terminal ID
information is printed at the top of documents that you send through I-fax.
Information such as your I-fax address and name are printed, enabling the recipient
to know who sent the document.
IMPORTANT
In the United States, this setting must be set to 'On'. Please see p. xiv in the Facsimile
Guide and p. 1-10 for details on FCC rules governing the use of facsimile equipment in
the United States.
NOTE
• If you set TX Terminal ID to 'On', you can also set the position that the Terminal ID
information is printed on the recipient's paper.
• The default settings are:
- TX Terminal ID: On
- Printing Position: Outside
1
8
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications
Settings] ➞ [TX Settings] under Common Settings.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Automatic Document
Deletion," on p. 8-4.
2
8-28
Press [▼] or [▲] until [TX Terminal ID] appears ➞ press [TX
Terminal ID].
Printing the TX Terminal ID
Select [On] or [Off].
Customizing Communications Settings
3
● If you select [On] and the optional Super G3 FAX Board is not
installed:
❑ Select the printing position of the Terminal ID information ➞ press [OK].
8
[Inside]:
The Terminal ID information is printed inside the image area on the
recipient's paper.
[Outside]: The Terminal ID information is printed outside the image area on
the recipient's paper.
Printing the TX Terminal ID
8-29
Example:
If you set the TX Terminal ID setting to 'On', the Terminal ID
information is printed on the recipient's paper as follows:
Outside
05/11/2003
15:00
IFAX john@canon.com
Customizing Communications Settings
Original
Area
Inside
05/11/2003
15:00
IFAX john@canon.com
The selected mode is set.
● If you select [On] and the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed:
❑ Press [Option].
8
8-30
Printing the TX Terminal ID
❑ Specify the <Printing Position> of the Transmission Terminal ID and the
Printing Position
[Inside]:
The Terminal ID information is printed inside the image area on the
recipient's paper.
[Outside]: The Terminal ID information is printed outside the image area on
the recipient's paper.
Telephone # Mark
[FAX]:
'FAX' is printed before the fax number.
[TEL]:
'TEL' is printed before the telephone number.
Example:
If you set the TX Terminal ID setting to 'On', the Terminal ID
information is printed on the recipient's paper as follows:
Outside
04/21/2003 MON15:00
8
03 1234 5678
Original
Area
FAX/TEL
Inside
04/21/2003 MON15:00
Customizing Communications Settings
<Telephone # Mark> ➞ press [OK] ➞ [OK].
03 1234 5678
The selected mode is set.
Printing the TX Terminal ID
8-31
● If you select [Off]:
Customizing Communications Settings
❑ Press [OK].
The selected mode is set.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
8
8-32
Printing the TX Terminal ID
You can set the Gamma value for color scanned data. If the set value corresponds
to the Gamma value at the receiving end, the scanning exposure of the output data
at the receiving end is automatically adjusted to the level best suited to the quality
of the original. Gamma values are expressed as input-output characteristics.
Output is darkened as the gamma value is increased, and is lightened as the
gamma value is decreased. If the density of images received at the destination is
excessively light or dark, the gamma value can be changed before resending the
images.
NOTE
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, and you are sending documents by fax,
this setting is disabled.
• The default setting is 'Gamma 1.8'.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications
Settings] ➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Automatic Document
Deletion," on p. 8-4.
2
8
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Gamma Value for Color Send Jobs]
appears ➞ press [Gamma Value for Color Send Jobs].
Gamma Value for Color Send Jobs
Customizing Communications Settings
Gamma Value for Color Send Jobs
8-33
Customizing Communications Settings
3
Select the Gamma value ([Gamma 1.0], [Gamma 1.4],
[Gamma 1.8], or [Gamma 2.2]), ➞ press [OK].
[Gamma 1.0]: Although light output results can be obtained, the overall color
impression is pale.
[Gamma 1.4]: Output results slightly lighter than default can be obtained.
[Gamma 1.8]: Default setting of this machine. Dark output results can be
obtained, while the detail of the darkest portion is not solid.
[Gamma 2.2]: Dark output results can be obtained overall, although the detail of
the darkest portion may be solid.
The word "solid" implies the following conditions.
For example, if you adjust the exposure to a darker setting when making copies
of an image, the fine details may appear blended in with the background. As a
result, the fine details may not show in a distinct fashion.
8
The selected mode is set.
4
8-34
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Gamma Value for Color Send Jobs
Initializing TX Settings
You can restore almost all of the TX settings to their default settings.
NOTE
If you initialize the TX Settings, the settings stored in the favorites buttons are also
initialized.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications
Settings] ➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Automatic Document
Deletion," on p. 8-4.
2
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Initialize TX Settings] appears ➞ press
[Initialize TX Settings].
Customizing Communications Settings
IMPORTANT
You cannot initialize the Sender's Names (TTI), Unit Name, and TX Terminal ID settings.
8
Initializing TX Settings
8-35
Customizing Communications Settings
3
Press [Yes].
To cancel initializing the TX Settings, press [No].
The message <Initialized.> appears for approximately two seconds on the touch
panel display.
8
The TX settings are initialized.
4
8-36
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Initializing TX Settings
Two-Sided Printing
You can print received documents on both sides of the paper you select. This
enables you to save paper.
1
Customizing Communications Settings
NOTE
The default setting is 'Off'.
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications
Settings].
8
2
Press [RX Settings] under <Common Settings>.
Two-Sided Printing
8-37
Customizing Communications Settings
3
Press [Two-sided Print].
4
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
8
The selected mode is set.
5
8-38
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Two-Sided Printing
Paper Drawer Selection
You can set how the machine prints documents when there is no paper matching
the size of the received document.
• Switch
A:
The image is printed over two sheets of paper that have the same
combined size as the received document.
Received Data (Original)
11" x 17"
• Switch
B:
Output
LTR
LTR
The image is printed with blank space on paper that has the same
width as the received document.
Received Data (Original)
LTR
8
Output
11" x 17"
Paper Drawer Selection
Customizing Communications Settings
There are four printing methods (Switches A, B, C, and D):
8-39
• Switch
C:
The image is reduced and printed on paper that differs in width from
the received document.
Received Data (Original)
Output
Customizing Communications Settings
LTRR
11" x 17"
• Switch
D:
The image is printed on paper that is larger in size than the received
document.
Received Data (Original)
Output
LTRR
11" x 17"
NOTE
• For more information on selecting a paper source for printing received documents, see
Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.
• The default setting for all switches is 'On'.
8
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications
Settings] ➞ [RX Settings] under <Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Two-Sided Printing," on
p. 8-37.
8-40
Paper Drawer Selection
Press [Select Cassette].
3
Select [On] or [Off] for the respective switches ➞ press [OK].
Customizing Communications Settings
2
8
The selected mode is set.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Paper Drawer Selection
8-41
Reducing a Received Document
You can set the machine to automatically reduce received documents so that the
whole document is printed within the printable area of the paper.
Customizing Communications Settings
NOTE
The default settings are:
- Receive Reduction: On
- RX Reduction:
Auto
- Reduce %:
90%
- Reduce Direction:
Vertical Only
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications
Settings] ➞ [RX Settings] under <Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Two-Sided Printing," on
p. 8-37.
2
Press [Receive Reduction].
8
8-42
Reducing a Received Document
Select [On] or [Off].
IMPORTANT
If you select [Off], the received document is not automatically reduced to fit the size
of the paper. If the size of the received document exceeds the printable area, the
image is divided into equal sections and printed onto separate sheets of paper.
However, if the received document exceeds the recording paper slightly
(1/2" (12 mm) or less), the part of the image that does not fit on the paper is not
printed.
● If you select [On]:
❑ Select [Auto] or [Fixed Reduction].
Customizing Communications Settings
3
8
[Auto]:
The image is automatically reduced by a suitable
reduction ratio that can range from the value set in the
Reduce % drop-down list up to 100% of the size of the
received document.
[Fixed Reduction]: The image is reduced by the reduction ratio set in the
Reduce % drop-down list.
Reducing a Received Document
8-43
Customizing Communications Settings
❑ Press the Reduce % drop-down list ➞ select [97%], [95%], [90%], or [75%].
❑ Select [Vertical & Horizontal] or [Vertical Only] ➞ press [OK].
8
[Vertical & Horizontal]:
The image is reduced in both the vertical and
horizontal directions.
[Vertical Only]:
The image is reduced in the vertical direction only.
The selected mode is set.
8-44
Reducing a Received Document
● If you select [Off]:
The selected mode is set.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Customizing Communications Settings
❑ Press [OK].
8
Reducing a Received Document
8-45
Printing Footer Information on a Received
Document
Customizing Communications Settings
You can set whether the machine prints the date received, day received, time
received, transaction number, and page number at the bottom of the received
document.
04/21/2003
MON
11:20
JOB NO. 5010
001
Page Number
Transaction Number
Time Received
Day Received
Date Received
NOTE
The default setting is 'Off'.
8
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications
Settings] ➞ [RX Settings] under <Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Two-Sided Printing," on
p. 8-37.
8-46
Printing Footer Information on a Received Document
Press [Received Page Footer].
3
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Customizing Communications Settings
2
8
The selected mode is set.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Printing Footer Information on a Received Document
8-47
2 On 1 Log
This mode enables you to print two received documents of the same paper size
onto a single sheet of paper.
Customizing Communications Settings
The 2 On 1 Log mode is available only under the following conditions:
• The
same paper drawer must be selected for printing two consecutive pages of
the received document.
• The paper in the selected paper drawer must be large enough for two consecutive
pages to be printed out.
- Example: If the LTR drawer is empty, but the 11" x 17" drawer is loaded with
paper, you can print two LTR documents onto a single sheet of 11" x 17" paper.
NOTE
• When the 2 On 1 Log mode is set to 'On', documents are printed with a broken line in the
middle. If the document is received with sender information included, the dotted line is
not printed on the area where the sender information is located.
• The default setting is 'Off'.
1
8
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications
Settings] ➞ [RX Settings] under <Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Two-Sided Printing," on
p. 8-37.
2
8-48
2 On 1 Log
Press [2 On 1 Log].
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
The selected mode is set.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Customizing Communications Settings
3
8
2 On 1 Log
8-49
8
Customizing Communications Settings
8-50
2 On 1 Log
Storing/Editing Address Book
Settings
9
CHAPTER
This chapter describes how to register various addresses in the Address Book and how to edit
and erase registered information.
Address Book Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
About the Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Storing New Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
E-Mail Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
I-Fax Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
File Server Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Group Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Address Obtained via a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Editing Address Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Erasing Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Naming an Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60
Erasing One-Touch Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-87
9-1
Address Book Settings Table
The following items can be stored or set in Address Book Settings, from the
Additional Functions screen.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
Item
Settings
Applicable
Page
Register Address
Register New Address
Edit
Erase
p. 9-5
Register Address Book Name
Register Name
p. 9-58
One-touch Buttons
Register/Edit, Erase
p. 9-60
NOTE
For instructions on how to set the modes not described in this manual, refer to the other
manuals listed in the front of this Sending Guide. (See "Manuals for the Machine," on
p. ii.)
9
9-2
Address Book Settings Table
The Address Book is a feature used for storing destinations of e-mail, I-fax, and file
servers. The Address Book is divided into 10 subaddress books and one-touch
buttons. You can store up to 1,800 destinations, including 1,600 destinations in the
subaddress book, and 200 destinations in one-touch buttons. Registering a
destination in the Address Book saves you the effort of entering that destination's
address each time you send a job. By storing your own e-mail address, you can
specify a reply e-mail address and use the Job Done Notice function.
The following types of destinations can be stored in the Address Book.
NOTE
• Since each address entry is treated as a single entry, if an e-mail address is registered in
a group address, that e-mail address and the group address are counted as two entries.
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, fax numbers can also be stored in the
Address Book. For instructions on storing fax numbers, see Chapter 10, "Storing/Editing
Address Book Settings," in the Facsimile Guide.
■ E-mail
You can store e-mail addresses.
An e-mail address obtained by searching through the directory listings on a server using
LDAP can also be stored.
■ I-Fax
You can store the I-fax address, the mode, and the destination conditions.
An e-mail address obtained by searching through the directory listings on a server using
LDAP can also be stored as an I-fax address.
■ File
You can register a protocol, host name, file path, etc. for storing scanned documents in a
file server.
NOTE
For examples of settings needed for sending to a file server, see the Network Guide.
About the Address Book
9-3
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
About the Address Book
9
■ Group
You can register multiple destinations of various types in the group address. You can
group and use these registered destinations according to your needs.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
NOTE
• You cannot register new destinations in a group address. New destinations need to be
registered in the Address Book before you can register them as part of a group address.
• When setting a group address, you can select and store only destinations registered in
the same subaddress book.
9
9-4
About the Address Book
Storing New Addresses
NOTE
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, fax numbers can also be stored in the
Address Book. For instructions on storing fax numbers, see Chapter 10, "Storing/Editing
Address Book Settings," in the Facsimile Guide.
E-Mail Addresses
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
If you register a destination in the Address Book, you can save yourself the effort of
entering the destination every time it is used. That destination can also be selected
from the Address Book for use in any other customized setting.
9
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK]. (See "Address Book Password," on
p. 10-22.)
Storing New Addresses
9-5
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
2
Press [Register Address].
3
Press [Register New Address].
4
Press [E-mail].
9
9-6
Storing New Addresses
Press [Name].
6
Enter a name for the e-mail address ➞ press [OK].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
5
9
You can enter up to 24 characters for the name.
If you press [Shift], the entry mode changes to the upper case mode, in which
upper case characters and some symbols (e.g., @) can be entered.
NOTE
• For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• The first character that you enter for the name is used for sorting the address list
when you press keys, such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Search Address
Book/Server screen.
Storing New Addresses
9-7
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
7
Press the Address Book drop-down list ➞ select one of the
numbered subaddress books.
Address Books 1 to 10 are used to divide the Address Book into 10 parts, called
subaddress books. This is a convenient way to classify destinations.
The e-mail address that you enter will be stored in the subaddress book that you
select here.
8
Press [E-mail Address] ➞ enter the e-mail address ➞ press
[OK].
9
You can enter up to 128 characters for the e-mail address.
If you press [Shift], the entry mode changes to the upper case mode, in which
upper case characters and some symbols (e.g., @) can be entered.
9-8
Storing New Addresses
9
Finish storing the address.
● If Access Number Management is set to 'On':
❑ Enter the access number using
-
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Press [Next].
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK].
9
The access number can be the number of an existing private address book,
or you can assign access numbers to individual addresses within the address
book.
If you do not want to set an access number for this e-mail address, press [OK]
without entering any number.
You can enter up to seven digits for the access number. If you enter fewer than
seven digits, the machine stores the access number with leading zeros.
Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
You cannot store an access number with only zeros as the number, such as
<0000000>.
The display returns to the Register New Address Screen.
Storing New Addresses
9-9
● If Access Number Management is set to 'Off':
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Press [OK].
9
The display returns to the Register New Address screen.
NOTE
• To access the Access Number Management setting, press
(Additional
Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Manage/Access to Address Book] ➞ [Access
Number Management]. (See "Manage/Access to Address Book," on p. 10-22.)
• If there is any required setting for storing destinations that has not been set, the
screen for specifying the setting is displayed.
10 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
I-Fax Addresses
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞
[Register Address].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "E-Mail Addresses," on
p. 9-5.
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK]. (See "Address Book Password," on
p. 10-22.)
9-10
Storing New Addresses
Press [Register New Address].
3
Press [I-Fax].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
2
9
4
Press [Name].
Storing New Addresses
9-11
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
5
Enter a name for the I-fax address ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 24 characters for the name.
NOTE
• For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• The first character that you enter for the name is used for sorting the address list
when you press keys, such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Search Address
Book/Server screen.
6
Press the Address Book drop-down list ➞ select one of the
numbered subaddress books.
9
Address Books 1 to 10 are used to divide the Address Book into 10 parts, called
subaddress books. This is a convenient way to classify destinations.
The I-fax address that you enter will be stored in the subaddress book that you
select here.
9-12
Storing New Addresses
Press the Mode drop-down list ➞ select [Simple] or [Full].
[Simple]:
Sends scanned data as an image via the Internet.
[Full]:
Sends scanned data as an image via the Internet, and enables you to
receive a delivery confirmation message telling you whether your
I-fax was sent successfully.
NOTE
• In order for you to receive a confirmation message telling you the delivery status of
your I-fax document, the recipient's machine must have I-fax capabilities and be
compatible with the Full mode.
• If you send documents using the Full mode to a machine that does not support the
Full mode, delivery confirmation cannot be carried out. When this happens, the job
concerned is not considered as complete even though the actual sending of the
document is successful. Such jobs are displayed as <Waiting for result...> on the
Status screen until the time set for Full Mode TX Timeout in E-mail/I-Fax Settings in
Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) has lapsed. After the timeout, the job is moved to the log, and the result is
shown as <->.
Storing New Addresses
9-13
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
7
9
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
8
Press [I-Fax Address] ➞ enter the I-fax address ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 128 characters for the I-fax address.
If you press [Shift], the entry mode changes to the upper case mode, in which
upper case characters and some symbols (e.g., @) can be entered.
NOTE
If you do not send documents via a server, and if the recipient's IP address is not
registered with a DNS server, enter a domain name in the following format:
(user)@(the recipient's IP address).
9
Press [Standard Field 1] and [Standard Field 2] ➞ enter their
respective standard fields ➞ press [OK].
9
Standard Field 1 and Standard Field 2 are settings required for using an Internet
fax service. For details, contact your service provider.
If you do not use an Internet fax service, this step is not necessary.
[Standard Field 1]: You can enter up to 40 characters.
[Standard Field 2]: You can enter up to 16 characters.
9-14
Storing New Addresses
NOTE
After pressing [OK], the standard field that you entered appears as asterisks
(********) on the I-fax settings screen.
[On]:
Sends documents via a server. You can send documents to destinations
via the Internet in the same way as e-mail.
[Off]:
Does not send documents via a server. You can send large amounts of
image data to a recipient within the same LAN (Local Area Network)
environment without placing a burden on the mail server. This enables
you to send documents quickly and directly to the recipient. To use this
setting, it is necessary to set up an MX (Mail eXchange) record on the
DNS server. Ask your System Manager whether this type of sending is
possible before you set Send Via Server to 'Off'.
9
If you specify the Standard Field settings, set Send Via Server to 'On'.
NOTE
The Send Via Server setting is available only if <Use Send Via Server> is set to
'On' on the E-mail/I-Fax Settings screen. To access this screen, press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Communications Settings] ➞
[E-mail/I-Fax Settings]. If <Use Send Via Server> is set to 'Off', <Send Via Server>
is grayed out, and the I-fax jobs are always sent via the server. (See "E-Mail/I-Fax
Settings," on p. 10-4.)
Storing New Addresses
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
10 Select [On] or [Off] for <Send Via Server>.
9-15
11 Press [Destination Conditions] ➞ specify the receiving
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
conditions of the destination ➞ press [OK].
The following conditions are always selected:
- Paper Size:
A4/LTR
- Compression Method: MH
- Resolution:
200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi
LTR, LGL, and STMT are included in [LTR].
IMPORTANT
Set the destination conditions according to the specification of the recipient's
machine. An error may occur if you set conditions that the recipient cannot use.
NOTE
Available compression methods are:
- MH (Modified Huffman) – a coding system that horizontally scans and
compresses extended areas of white and black dots.
- MR (Modified Read) – a coding system that horizontally and vertically scans and
compresses white and black areas. Faster than MH.
- MMR (Modified Modified Read) – an adaptation of Modified Read, originally for
use in digital machines. Faster than MR.
9
9-16
Storing New Addresses
12 Finish storing the address.
● If Access Number Management is set to 'On':
❑ Enter the access number using
-
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Press [Next].
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK].
9
The access number can be the number of an existing private address book,
or you can assign access numbers to individual addresses within the address
book.
If you do not want to set an access number for this I-fax address, press [OK]
without entering any number.
You can enter up to seven digits for the access number. If you enter fewer than
seven digits, the machine stores the access number with leading zeros.
Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
You cannot store an access number with only zeros as the number, such as
<0000000>.
The display returns to the Register New Address screen.
Storing New Addresses
9-17
● If Access Number Management is set to 'Off':
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Press [OK].
The display returns to the Register New Address screen.
NOTE
• To access the Access Number Management setting, press
(Additional
Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Manage/Access to Address Book] ➞ [Access
Number Management]. (See "Manage/Access to Address Book," on p. 10-22.)
• If there is any required setting for storing destinations that has not been set, the
screen for specifying the setting is displayed.
13 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
9
9-18
Storing New Addresses
File Server Addresses
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞
[Register Address].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
NOTE
• For examples of the settings needed to send to a file server, see the Network Guide.
• For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• You can enter up to 24 characters for the file server name.
• You can enter up to 128 characters for the host name and file path.
• You can input the user name as follows:
- If FTP is selected:
Up to 24 characters
- If Windows (SMB) is selected:
When inputting the user name: Up to 20 characters
When inputting domain name\user name: Domain name: Up to 15 characters, User
name: Up to 20 characters
When inputting for UPN: Up to 128 characters
- If NetWare (IPX) is selected:
Up to 24 characters
• UPN (User Principal Name) can be used only if you are sending to a computer belonging
to a domain operated with Active Directory.
• Up to 24 characters (14 characters when Windows (SMB) is selected) can be entered for
the password.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "E-Mail Addresses," on
p. 9-5.
9
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK]. (See "Address Book Password," on
p. 10-22.)
Storing New Addresses
9-19
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
2
Press [Register New Address].
3
Press [File].
4
Press [Name].
9
9-20
Storing New Addresses
Enter a name for the file server address ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 24 characters for the name.
NOTE
• For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• The first character that you enter for the name is used for sorting the address list
when you press keys, such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Search Address
Book/Server screen.
6
Press the Address Book drop-down list ➞ select one of the
numbered subaddress books.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
5
9
Address Books 1 to 10 are used to divide the Address Book into 10 parts, called
subaddress books. This is a convenient way to classify destinations.
The file server address that you enter will be stored in the subaddress book that
you select here.
Storing New Addresses
9-21
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
7
Press the Protocol drop-down list ➞ select the desired
protocol.
The following protocols may be used:
[FTP]:
Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a
computer running Sun Solaris 2.6 or later, Mac OS X or later,
Internet Information Server 4.0 under Windows NT Server
4.0, Internet Information Services 5.0 under Windows 2000
Server, or Internet Information Services 5.1 under Windows
XP Professional.
[Windows (SMB)]:
Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a
computer running Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 95/98/Me/
2000/XP.
[NetWare (IPX)]:
Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a
computer running Novell NetWare 3.2 or later.
9
9-22
Storing New Addresses
Set [Host Name], [File Path], [User], and [Password].
NOTE
For instructions on specifying each of the settings for FTP, Windows (SMB), and
NetWare (IPX), see "Specifying a File Server," on p. 2-13.
9
Finish storing the address.
● If Access Number Management is set to 'On':
❑ Press [Next].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
8
9
Storing New Addresses
9-23
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Enter the access number using
-
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK].
The access number can be the number of an existing private address book,
or you can assign access numbers to individual addresses within the address
book.
If you do not want to set an access number for this files server address, press
[OK] without entering any number.
You can enter up to seven digits for the access number. If you enter fewer than
seven digits, the machine stores the access number with leading zeros.
Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
You cannot store an access number with only zeros as the number, such as
<0000000>.
The display returns to the Register New Address Screen.
● If Access Number Management is set to 'Off':
❑ Press [OK].
9
The display returns to the Register New Address screen.
9-24
Storing New Addresses
NOTE
• To access the Access Number Management setting, press
(Additional
Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Manage/Access to Address Book] ➞ [Access
Number Management]. (See "Manage/Access to Address Book," on p. 10-22.)
• If there is any required setting for storing destinations that has not been set, the
screen for specifying the setting is displayed.
10 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
The Group Address feature enables you to create a group of up to 256 stored
destinations as a single destination.
IMPORTANT
If you want to store a group address, the destinations must be stored beforehand, such
as e-mail addresses and file servers.
NOTE
• If you want to store a group address, you can only select destinations that are registered
in the same subaddress book.
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, fax numbers can also be stored in a
group address along with e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, and file server addresses.
For instructions on storing this type of addresses, see Chapter 10, "Storing/Editing
Address Book Settings," in the Facsimile Guide.
1
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
Group Addresses
9
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞
[Register Address].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "E-Mail Addresses," on
p. 9-5.
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK]. (See "Address Book Password," on
p. 10-22.)
Storing New Addresses
9-25
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
2
Press [Register New Address].
3
Press [Group].
4
Press [Name].
9
9-26
Storing New Addresses
Enter a name for the group address ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 24 characters for the name.
NOTE
• For instructions on entering characters on the touch panel display, see Chapter 2,
"Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide.
• The first character that you enter for the name is used for sorting the address list
when you press keys, such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Search Address
Book/Server screen.
6
Press the Address Book drop-down list ➞ select one of the
numbered subaddress books.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
5
9
Address Books 1 to 10 are used to divide the Address Book into 10 parts, called
subaddress books. This is a convenient way to classify destinations.
The group address that you enter will be stored in the subaddress book that you
select here.
Storing New Addresses
9-27
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
7
Select [Address Book] or [Store In Usr Inbox].
To store destinations in a group address, those destinations must be stored in the
subaddress book that contains the group address.
You cannot store destinations from different subaddress books in the group
address. For example, you cannot store e-mail addresses from Address Book 1
and file server addresses from Address Book 2 into the same group address.
● If you select [Address Book], and if Access Number Management is
set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is stored with
an access number or in a private address book:
❑ Press [Access Number].
9
9-28
Storing New Addresses
❑ Enter the access number using
-
(numeric keys) for the private address
If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with
the Access Number setting are displayed.
To cancel entering the Access Number, press [Cancel].
❑ Select the destination ➞ press [OK].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
book or destination ➞ press [OK].
9
Storing New Addresses
9-29
● If you select [Address Book], and Access Number Management is
set to 'Off', and the destination is not stored with an access number
or in a private address book:
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Select the destination ➞ press [OK].
To cancel a selected destination, select the destination once more to clear the
check mark.
Press the alphabet keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the range of entries. Press the
same key again to return to the full address list.
If the desired destination to be selected is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to
scroll to the desired destination.
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, you can also display fax
numbers.
You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by
pressing the Type drop-down list.
9
Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
9-30
Storing New Addresses
Repeat step 7 to add other destinations.
The destination you have stored is listed.
NOTE
To display [Access Number], set Access Number Management to 'On'. To access
the Access Number Management setting, press
(Additional Functions) ➞
[System Settings] ➞ [Manage/Access to Address Book] ➞ [Access Number
Management]. (See "Manage/Access to Address Book," on p. 10-22.)
● If you select [Store In Usr Inbox]:
❑ Select the User Inbox in which to store the document from the Inbox Selection
screen ➞ press [OK].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
You can select a destination and press [Details] to display the screen shown
below. This enables you to confirm the detailed information related to the
selected destinations. Press [Done] to return to the previous screen.
9
User Inboxes specified as destinations correspond to the inboxes that appear
on the Inbox Selection screen for the Mail Box function.
If the User Inbox to be selected is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to
the User Inbox.
Repeat step 7 to add other types of destinations.
Storing New Addresses
9-31
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
The selected User Inbox is displayed and listed.
NOTE
Only one User Inbox can be stored in a group address.
● To erase a destination:
❑ Select an address in the group ➞ press [Erase].
9
If the destination to be selected is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to
the destination.
The selected destination is erased.
9-32
Storing New Addresses
8
Finish storing the address.
● If Access Number Management is set to 'On':
❑ Enter the access number using
-
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Press [Next].
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK].
9
The access number can be the number of an existing private address book,
or you can assign access numbers to individual addresses within the address
book.
If you do not want to set an access number for this group address, press [OK]
without entering any number.
You can enter up to seven digits for the access number. If you enter fewer than
seven digits, the machine stores the access number with leading zeros.
Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
You cannot store an access number with only zeros as the number, such as
<0000000>.
The display returns to the Register New Address Screen.
Storing New Addresses
9-33
● If Access Number Management is set to 'Off':
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Press [OK].
9
The display returns to the Register New Address screen.
NOTE
• To access the Access Number Management setting, press
(Additional
Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Manage/Access to Address Book] ➞ [Access
Number Management]. (See "Manage/Access to Address Book," on p. 10-22.)
• If there is any required setting for storing destinations that has not been set, the
screen for specifying the setting is displayed.
9
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Address Obtained via a Server
You can store an address that is obtained by searching the directory listings on the
network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers.
NOTE
• You may have to set up the LDAP servers beforehand, depending on the network
environment.
• For more information on LDAP servers, see "LDAP Server Settings," on p. 10-66.
• Only names and e-mail addresses are displayed as the search results from the LDAP
server. (If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, fax numbers are also displayed.)
• To display [Access Number], set Access Number Management to 'On'. To access the
Access Number Management setting, press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System
Settings] ➞ [Manage/Access to Address Book] ➞ [Access Number Management]. (See
"Manage/Access to Address Book," on p. 10-22.)
9-34
Storing New Addresses
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞
[Register Address].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "E-Mail Addresses," on
p. 9-5.
2
Press [Register New Address].
3
Press [Search on Server].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK]. (See "Address Book Password," on
p. 10-22.)
9
Storing New Addresses
9-35
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
4
5
Press the Server to Search drop-down list ➞ select the
desired server to search.
Specify the search criteria.
NOTE
• For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• If you want to search for a destination that is registered with an e-mail address and
a fax number, you can search for the e-mail address by entering the fax number as
the search criterion.
● To use Simple Search:
❑ Press [Name], [E-mail], or [Fax] ➞ enter the name, e-mail address, or fax
number for which to search ➞ press [OK].
9
You can enter up to 128 characters for the name, e-mail address, or fax
number.
You can also use
clear your entries.
9-36
Storing New Addresses
-
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to
The search criteria boxes that are not filled out, are not searched.
To make a more detailed search with multiple search conditions, press
[Detailed Search], and follow the directions below. The search criteria you
entered for Simple Search are continuously used in Detailed Search.
● To use Detailed Search:
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Press [Detailed Search].
❑ Press the search category drop-down list ➞ select the desired search
category.
Search Category
9
The available search categories are:
[Name]:
Search by name.
[E-mail]:
Search by e-mail address.
[Fax]:
Search by fax number.
[Organization]:
Search by organization name.
[OrgnztionUnit]: Search by organizational unit (e.g., departments in an
organization).
Storing New Addresses
9-37
For example, if you want to enter the location to start searching on the
directory tree of the LDAP Server, and ou=salesdept, o=canon, c=jp is the
distinguished name in the directory, enter the organization/organizationUnit of
the user as follows:
organizationUnit=salesdept
organization=canon
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
NOTE
• The organization/organizationUnit can be used as search categories only if the
information has been registered on the LDAP server.
• A Detailed Search by organization/organizationUnit may not be performed
depending on whether the attribute types have been registered on the LDAP
server, and the type of application on the server, such as Windows 2000 Server
with Active Directory.
❑ Press the search condition drop-down list ➞ select the desired search
condition ➞ press [Settings].
Search Condition
9
The available search conditions are:
[contains]:
The result must contain the entered name, e-mail
address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[does not contain]: The result must not contain the entered name, e-mail
address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
9-38
[equals]:
The result must be exactly the same as the entered
name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or
organizational unit.
[differs from]:
The result must be different from the name, e-mail
address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit
that you entered.
[begins with]:
The result must begin with the same first few letters that
you entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number,
organization, or organizational unit.
[ends with]:
The result must end with the same last few letters that you
entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number,
organization, or organizational unit.
Storing New Addresses
You can enter up to 128 characters for the search criteria.
You can also use
clear your entries.
-
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to
❑ Press [Add].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Enter the search criteria ➞ press [OK].
9
To continue adding more search criteria, press [or] or [and] ➞ repeat step 5.
[or]:
The machine searches and returns a result for either of the specified
search criteria.
[and]:
The machine searches and returns a result for all of the specified
search criteria.
To edit the contents of search criteria, select the search criterion that you want
to edit ➞ press [Edit] ➞ [Settings]. To delete search criteria, select the
criterion that you want to erase ➞ press [Erase].
Storing New Addresses
9-39
NOTE
• You can specify up to four different search criteria at a time.
• If you specify three or more search criteria, you cannot use both [or] and [and]
together.
• If you press [Simple Search] after specifying search criteria on the Detailed Search
screen, the display changes to the Simple Search screen, and the specified
detailed search criteria are deleted.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
6
Press [Start Searching].
To cancel searching, press [Cancel].
To cancel searching while the machine is searching for your criteria, press
[Cancel]. If the machine finds some results before you press [Cancel], these
search results are displayed.
IMPORTANT
The number of search results displayed will not exceed the maximum limit set in
Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). If
the desired destination is not displayed, either increase the maximum number of
addresses to search, or change the search criteria. (See "LDAP Server Settings,"
on p. 10-66.)
9
NOTE
If you press [Start Searching] without specifying any search criteria, all the
addresses stored on the LDAP server are displayed.
9-40
Storing New Addresses
● If the screen below is displayed:
You can enter up to 128 characters for the user name.
The login screen is displayed if either one of the following is true:
If Login Information in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use', and <Display authentication
dialog when searching> is set to 'On'.
If the user name, password, and domain name specified in Register LDAP
Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are incorrect.
❑ Press [Password] ➞ enter the password ➞ press [OK].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Press [User] ➞ enter the user name ➞ press [OK].
9
You can enter up to 24 characters for the password.
You can also use
clear your entries.
-
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to
Storing New Addresses
9-41
NOTE
• For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• You can also use
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to clear
your entries.
• After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks (*****) on
the Enter Network Password screen.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Verify the settings ➞ press [OK].
The search results are displayed.
IMPORTANT
The number of search results displayed will not exceed the maximum limit set in
Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Function screen). If
the desired destination is not displayed, either increase the maximum number of
addresses to search, or change the search conditions. (See "LDAP Server
Settings," on p. 10-66.)
9
7
9-42
Select the destination that you want to store in the Address
Book from the search results ➞ press [Next].
Storing New Addresses
To continue searching, press [Back].
You can select multiple destinations.
If the desired destination is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired destination.
You can register the selected e-mail address for an I-fax address by pressing
[Register e-mail address for I-Fax]. To register e-mail addresses for I-fax
addresses, register one e-mail address at a time.
If you want to select the first 64 destinations, press [Select All (Max 64
destinations)]. (If a destination is selected, the key changes to [Clear Selection].)
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, you can restrict the type of
destinations displayed in the results list by pressing the Type drop-down list.
Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
NOTE
To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check
mark.
Storing New Addresses
9-43
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, fax addresses that meet the
specified search criteria are also displayed.
9
8
Store the selected destination.
● If only one destination is selected:
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Verify the address ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, edit the contents of the address.
● If you want to store the destination with an access number, and the
Access Number Management setting is set to 'On':
❑ Press [Next].
9
9-44
Storing New Addresses
-
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK].
The access number can be the number of an existing private address book,
or you can assign access numbers to individual addresses within the address
book.
If you do not want to set an access number for this address, press [OK]
without entering any number.
You can enter up to seven digits for the access number. If you enter fewer than
seven digits, the machine stores the access number with leading zeros.
Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
You cannot store an access number with only zeros as the number, such as
<0000000>.
The display returns to the Register New Address screen.
NOTE
To display [Access Number], set Access Number Management to 'On'. To access
the Access Number Management setting, press
(Additional Functions) ➞
[System Settings] ➞ [Manage/Access to Address Book] ➞ [Access Number
Management]. (See "Manage/Access to Address Book," on p. 10-22.)
Storing New Addresses
9-45
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Enter the access number using
9
● If multiple destinations are selected:
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Select the subaddress book to store the addresses in ➞ press [OK].
If the subaddress book is stored with an access number, and the Access
Number Management setting is set to 'On', enter the access number using
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK].
9
The access number can be the number of an existing private address book,
or you can assign access numbers to individual addresses within the address
book.
If you do not want to set an access number for these addresses, press [OK]
without entering any number.
You can enter up to seven digits for the access number. If you enter fewer than
seven digits, the machine stores the access number with leading zeros.
Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
You cannot store an access number with only zeros as the number, such as
<0000000>.
9-46
Storing New Addresses
The display returns to the Register New Address screen.
NOTE
• The maximum number of destinations that can be selected at one time is 64.
• To display [Access Number], set the Access Number Management to 'On'. To
access the Access Number Management setting, press
(Additional Functions)
➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Manage/Access to Address Book] ➞ [Access Number
Management]. (See "Manage/Access to Address Book," on p. 10-22.)
● If you want to register the selected destination for an I-fax address:
❑ Verify the address ➞ press [OK].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Read the displayed message ➞ press [OK].
9
If necessary, edit the contents of the address.
Storing New Addresses
9-47
● If you want to store the destination with an access number, and the
Access Number Management setting is set to 'On':
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Press [Next].
❑ Enter the access number using
-
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK].
9
The access number can be the number of an existing private address book,
or you can assign access numbers to individual addresses within the address
book.
If you do not want to set an access number for this address, press [OK]
without entering any number.
You can enter up to seven digits for the access number. If you enter fewer than
seven digits, the machine stores the access number with leading zeros.
Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
You cannot store an access number with only zeros as the number, such as
<0000000>.
The display returns to the Register New Address screen.
9-48
Storing New Addresses
NOTE
To display [Access Number], set Access Number Management to 'On'. To access
the Access Number Management setting, press
(Additional Functions) ➞
[System Settings] ➞ [Manage/Access to Address Book] ➞ [Access Number
Management]. (See "Manage/Access to Address Book," on p. 10-22.)
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
9
9
Storing New Addresses
9-49
Editing Address Details
You can change destination details as necessary.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞
[Register Address].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "E-Mail Addresses," on
p. 9-5.
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK]. (See "Address Book Password," on
p. 10-22.)
2
Select the destination to be changed.
● If Access Number Management is set to 'On', and the destination is
stored with an access number or in a private address book:
❑ Press [Access Number].
9
9-50
Editing Address Details
❑ Enter the access number using
-
(numeric keys) for the private address
If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with
the Access Number setting are displayed.
To cancel entering the Access Number, press [Cancel].
❑ Select the destination to be changed ➞ press [Edit].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
book or destination ➞ press [OK].
9
Editing Address Details
9-51
● If Access Number Management is set to 'Off', or the destination is
not stored with an access number or in a private address book:
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Select the destination to be changed ➞ press [Edit].
You cannot edit multiple destinations at one time.
In this example, an e-mail address is selected.
Press the alphabet keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the range of entries. Press the
same key again to return to the full address list.
If the desired destination to be selected is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to
scroll to the desired destination.
You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by pressing
the Type drop-down list.
Press list of the Address Book drop-down list to display a subaddress books
(subaddress books 1 to 10). Subaddress books categorize the addresses stored
in the Address Book.
9
You cannot select a one-touch button stored in a subaddress book.
If you select [All] in the Address Book drop-down list, the destinations stored in
the one-touch buttons are displayed. However, you cannot edit these
destinations. For instructions on storing and editing one-touch buttons, see
"Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons," on p. 9-60.
The current settings for the selected destination appear.
NOTE
To display [Access Number], set Access Number Management to 'On'. To access
the Access Number Management setting, press
(Additional Functions) ➞
[System Settings] ➞ [Manage/Access to Address Book] ➞ [Access Number
Management]. (See "Manage/Access to Address Book," on p. 10-22.)
9-52
Editing Address Details
Edit the address details ➞ press [OK].
The screen differs depending on the address type you select in step 2.
You cannot change the address book of a group address, or change a
destination registered as a group address.
The display returns to the Register Address screen.
NOTE
• For instructions on setting e-mail addresses, see "E-Mail Addresses," on p. 9-5.
• For instructions on setting I-fax addresses, see "I-Fax Addresses," on p. 9-10.
• For instructions on setting file server, see "File Server Addresses," on p. 9-19.
• For instructions on setting group addresses, see "Group Addresses," on p. 9-25.
• If there is any required setting for storing destinations that has not been set, the
screen for specifying the setting is displayed.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Editing Address Details
9-53
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
3
9
Erasing Addresses
You can erase destinations stored in the address book.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞
[Register Address].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "E-Mail Addresses," on
p. 9-5.
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK]. (See "Address Book Password," on
p. 10-22.)
2
Select the destination to be erased.
● If Access Number Management is set to 'On', and the destination is
stored with an access number or in a private address book:
❑ Press [Access Number].
9
9-54
Erasing Addresses
❑ Enter the access number using
-
(numeric keys) for the private address
If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with
the Access Number setting are displayed.
To cancel entering the Access Number, press [Cancel].
❑ Select the destinaton to be erased ➞ press [Erase].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
book or destination ➞ press [OK].
9
Erasing Addresses
9-55
● If Access Number Management is set to 'Off', or the destination is
not stored with an access number or in a private address book:
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Select the destination to be erased ➞ press [Erase].
You cannot erase multiple destinations at one time.
Press the alphabet keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the range of entries. Press the
same key again to return to the full address list.
If the desired destination to be selected is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to
scroll to the desired destination.
You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by pressing
the Type drop-down list.
Press list of the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress
books (1 to 10). Subaddress books categorize the addresses stored in the
Address Book.
You cannot select a one-touch button stored in a subaddress book.
9
If you select [All] in the Address Book drop-down list, the destinations stored in
the one-touch buttons are displayed. However, you cannot erase these
destinations. For instructions on erasing one-touch buttons, see "Erasing
One-Touch Buttons," on p. 9-87.
9-56
Erasing Addresses
Press [Yes].
To cancel erasing, press [No].
The message <Erased.> appears for approximately two seconds on the touch
panel display.
The selected destination is erased.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
3
9
Erasing Addresses
9-57
Naming an Address Book
You can assign a name to any subaddress book.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞
[Register Address Book Name].
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK]. (See "Address Book Password," on
p. 10-22.)
9
2
Select a subaddress book to name ➞ press [Register Name].
In this example, [Address Book 1] is selected.
9-58
Naming an Address Book
Enter a name ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 16 characters for a name.
NOTE
• For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• If you press [OK] without entering any characters, the subaddress book name
reverts to its current name (default Address Book 1 to 10).
4
Press [OK].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
3
9
The name of the Address Book is set.
5
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Naming an Address Book
9-59
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
You can store up to 200 destinations in the one-touch buttons feature. This section
describes how to store/edit the destinations with the one-touch buttons feature.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
IMPORTANT
If Language Switch in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to
'On', the Host Name and File Path of the file server destination may not be displayed
correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.
NOTE
• Destinations stored in one-touch buttons are also displayed in the Address Book.
• A new destination cannot be registered in a Group destination that is stored in a
one-touch button. A destination must be registered in a one-touch button in advance.
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, fax destinations also can be registered.
For instructions on registering a fax destination, see Chapter 10, "Storing/Editing
Address Book Settings," in the Facsimile Guide.
• You can also use
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to clear your
entries.
• For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
1
9
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞
[One-touch Buttons].
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK]. (See "Address Book Password," on
p. 10-22.)
9-60
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
Select a one-touch button to store or change ➞ press
[Register/Edit].
If the one-touch button to be selected is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll
to the one-touch button.
If you know the one-touch button's three digit number, press [
] (One-Touch
Button Number) ➞ enter the three digit number of the desired one-touch button
using
(numeric keys).
One-Touch Button
Number
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
2
9
If you select a one-touch button already storing a destination, proceed to step 4.
NOTE
• One-touch buttons that already have destinations stored in them are displayed with
a colored triangle ( ) in the lower right corner of the key.
• If you select a one-touch button that already has destinations stored in it, the
destinations are displayed.
• If you register multiple destinations as a group address in a one-touch button, the
number of destinations registered in the group address is displayed.
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
9-61
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
3
Select [E-mail], [I-Fax], [File], [Group], or [Search on Server].
● If you select [E-mail]:
❑ Press [Name].
9
❑ Enter a name for the e-mail address ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 24 characters for the name.
9-62
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
NOTE
The first character that you enter for the name is used for sorting the address list
when you press keys, such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Search Address
Book/Server screen.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Press [One-touch Button Name].
❑ Enter a name for the one-touch button ➞ press [OK].
9
You can enter up to 12 characters for the one-touch button's name.
If you press [Shift], the entry mode changes to the upper case mode, in which
upper case characters and some symbols (e.g., @) can be entered.
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
9-63
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Press [E-mail Address] ➞ enter the e-mail address ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 128 characters for the e-mail address.
If you press [Shift], the entry mode changes to the upper case mode, in which
upper case characters and some symbols (e.g., @) can be entered.
● If you select [I-Fax]:
❑ Press [Name].
9
9-64
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
You can enter up to 24 characters for the name.
NOTE
The first character that you enter for the name is used for sorting the address list
when you press keys, such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Search Address
Book/Server screen.
❑ Press [One-touch Button Name].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Enter a name for the I-fax address ➞ press [OK].
9
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
9-65
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Enter a name for the one-touch button ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 12 characters for the one-touch button's name.
If you press [Shift], the entry mode changes to the upper case mode, in which
upper case characters and some symbols (e.g., @) can be entered.
❑ Press the Mode drop-down list ➞ select [Simple] or [Full].
9
9-66
[Simple]:
Sends scanned data as an image via the Internet.
[Full]:
Sends scanned data as an image via the Internet, and enables
you to receive a delivery confirmation message telling you
whether your I-fax was sent successfully.
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
NOTE
• In order for you to receive a confirmation message telling you the delivery status of
your I-fax document, the recipient's machine must have I-fax capabilities and be
compatible with the Full mode.
• If you send documents using the Full mode to a machine that does not support the
Full mode, delivery confirmation cannot be carried out. When this happens, the job
concerned is not considered as complete even though the actual sending of the
document is successful. Such jobs are displayed as <Waiting for result...> on the
Status screen until the time set for Full Mode TX Timeout in E-mail/I-Fax Settings in
Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) has lapsed. After the timeout, the job is moved to the log, and the result is
shown as <->.
You can enter up to 128 characters for the I-fax address.
If you press [Shift], the entry mode changes to upper case mode, in which
upper case characters and some symbols (e.g., @) can be entered.
NOTE
If you do not send documents via a server, and if the recipient's IP address is not
registered with a DNS server, use the following format to enter the domain name:
(user)@(the recipient's IP address).
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
9-67
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Press [I-Fax Address] ➞ enter the I-fax address ➞ press [OK].
9
❑ Press [Standard Field 1] and [Standard Field 2] ➞ enter their respective
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
standard fields ➞ press [OK].
Standard Field 1 and Standard Field 2 are settings required for using an
Internet fax service. For details, contact your service provider.
If you do not use an Internet fax service, this step is not necessary.
[Standard Field 1]: You can enter up to 40 characters.
[Standard Field 2]: You can enter up to 16 characters.
NOTE
After pressing [OK], the standard field that you entered appears as asterisks
(********) on the I-fax settings screen.
9
9-68
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
[On]:
Sends documents via a server. You can send documents to
destinations via the Internet in the same way as e-mail.
[Off]:
Does not send documents via a server. You can send large amounts
of data to a recipient within the same LAN (Local Area Network)
environment without placing a burden on the mail server. This
enables you to send documents quickly and directly to the recipient.
To use this setting, it is necessary to set up an MX (Mail eXchange)
record on the DNS server. Ask your System Manager whether this
type of sending is possible before you set <Send Via Server> to 'Off'.
If you specify the Standard Field settings, set Send Via Server to 'On'.
IMPORTANT
The Send Via Server setting is available only if <Use Send Via Server> is set to
'On' on the E-mail/I-Fax Settings screen. To access this screen, press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Communications Settings] ➞
[E-mail/I-Fax Settings]. If <Use Send Via Server> is set to 'Off', <Send Via Server>
is grayed out, and the I-fax jobs are always sent via the server. (See "E-Mail/I-Fax
Settings," on p. 10-4.)
NOTE
Even if Send Via Server is set to 'Off', delivery confirmation of documents sent
using the Full mode is carried out via the server.
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
9-69
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Select [On] or [Off] for <Send Via Server>.
9
❑ Press [Destination Conditions] ➞ specify the receiving conditions of the
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
destination ➞ press [OK].
The following conditions are always selected:
- Paper Size:
A4/LTR
- Compression Method: MH
- Resolution:
200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi
LTR, LGL, and STMT are included in [LTR].
IMPORTANT
Set the destination conditions according to the specification of the recipient's
machine. An error may occur if you set conditions that the recipient cannot use.
NOTE
Available compression methods are:
- MH (Modified Huffman) – a coding system that horizontally scans and
compresses extended areas of white and black dots.
- MR (Modified Read) – a coding system that horizontally and vertically scans and
compresses white and black areas. Faster than MH.
- MMR (Modified Modified Read) – an adaptation of Modified Read, originally for
use in digital machines. Faster than MR.
9
9-70
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
● If you select [File]:
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Press [Name].
❑ Enter a name for the file server address ➞ press [OK].
9
You can enter up to 24 characters for the name.
NOTE
The first character that you enter for the name is used for sorting the address list
when you press keys, such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Search Address
Book/Server screen.
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
9-71
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Press [One-touch Button Name].
❑ Enter a name for the one-touch button ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 12 characters for the one-touch button's name.
9
❑ Press the Protocol drop-down list ➞ select the protocol.
9-72
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
The following protocols may be used:
[FTP]:
Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a
computer running Sun Solaris 2.6 or later, Mac OS X or
later, Internet Information Server 4.0 under Windows NT
Server 4.0, Internet Information Services 5.0 under
Windows 2000 Server, or Internet Information Services 5.1
under Windows XP Professional.
[Windows (SMB)]: Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a
computer running Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 95/98/Me/
2000/XP.
[NetWare (IPX)]:
Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a
computer running Novell NetWare 3.2 or later.
NOTE
For instructions on specifying each of the settings for FTP, Window (SMB), and
NetWare (IPX), see "Specifying a File Server," on p. 2-13.
● If you select [Group]:
❑ Press [Name].
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
9-73
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Set [Host Name], [File Path], [User], and [Password].
9
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Enter a name for the group address ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 24 characters for the name.
NOTE
The first character that you enter for the name is used for sorting the address list
when you press keys, such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Search Address
Book/Server screen.
❑ Press [One-touch Button Name].
9
9-74
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Enter a name for the one-touch button ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 12 characters for the name.
❑ Press [Specifying Destinations].
9
❑ Select a destination to store in the group address from [Address Book],
one-touch buttons, or [Store In Usr Inbox] ➞ press [OK].
Only destinations that are already stored in one-touch buttons can be
selected as part of a one-touch button group address.
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
9-75
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
If you know the one-touch button's three digit number, press [
] (One-Touch
Button Number) ➞ enter the three-digit number of the desired one-touch
button using
(numeric keys).
● If you select [Search on Server]:
❑ Press the Server to Search drop-down list ➞ select the desired server to
search.
9
9-76
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
❑ Specify the search criteria.
You can enter up to 128 characters for the name, e-mail address, or fax
number.
You can also use
clear your entries.
-
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to
The search criteria boxes that are not filled out, are not searched.
To make a more detailed search with multiple search conditions, press
[Detailed Search], and follow the directions below. The search criteria you
entered for Simple Search are continuously used in Detailed Search.
To use Detailed Search:
• Press [Detailed Search].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
To use Simple Search:
• Press [Name], [E-mail], or [Fax] ➞ enter the name, e-mail address, or fax
number for which to search ➞ press [OK].
9
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
9-77
• Press the search category drop-down list ➞ select the desired search
category.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
Search Category
The available search categories are:
[Name]:
Search by name.
[E-mail]:
Search by e-mail address.
[Fax]:
Search by fax number.
[Organization]: Search by organization name.
[OrgnztionUnit]: Search by organizational unit (e.g., departments in an
organization).
For example, if you want to enter the location to start searching on the
directory tree of the LDAP Server, and ou=salesdept, o=canon, c=jp is the
distinguished name in the directory, enter the organization/organizationUnit of
the user as follows:
organizationUnit=salesdept
organization=canon
9
• Press the search condition drop-down list ➞ select the desired search
condition ➞ press [Settings].
Search Condition
9-78
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
[contains]:
The result must contain the entered name, e-mail
address, fax number, organization, or organizational
unit.
[does not contain]:
The result must not contain the entered name, e-mail
address, fax number, organization, or organizational
unit.
[equals]:
The result must be exactly the same as the entered
name, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[differs from]:
The result must be different from the name, e-mail
address, fax number, organization, or organizational
unit that you entered.
[begins with]:
The result must begin with the same first few letters that
you entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number,
organization, or organizational unit.
[ends with]:
The result must end with the same last few letters that
you entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number,
organization, or organizational unit.
• Enter the search criteria ➞ press [OK].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
You can select from the following search conditions:
9
You can enter up to 128 characters for the search criteria.
You can also use
clear your entries.
-
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
9-79
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
• Press [Add].
To continue adding more search criteria, press [or] or [and] ➞ specify the
search criteria as on p. 9-77.
[or]:
The machine searches and returns a result for either of the specified
search criteria.
[and]:
The machine searches and returns a result for all of the specified
search criteria.
To edit the search criteria, select the search criterion that you want to edit ➞
press [Edit] ➞ [Settings]. To delete search criteria, select the criterion that you
want to erase ➞ press [Erase].
NOTE
• You can specify up to four different search criteria at a time.
• If you specify three or more search criteria, you cannot use both [or] and [and]
together.
• If you press [Simple Search] after specifying search criteria on the Detailed Search
screen, the display changes to the Simple Search screen, and the specified
detailed search criteria are deleted.
• Only names and e-mail addresses are displayed as the search results from the
LDAP server. (If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, fax numbers are
also displayed.)
• If you want to search for a destination that is registered with an e-mail address and
a fax number, you can search for the e-mail address by entering the fax number as
the search criterion.
• The organization/organizationUnit can be used as search categories only if the
information has been registered on the LDAP server.
• A Detailed Search by organization/organizationUnit may not be performed
depending on whether the attribute types have been registered on the LDAP
server, and the type of application on the server, such as Windows 2000 Server
with Active Directory.
9
9-80
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
To cancel searching, press [Cancel].
To cancel searching while the machine is searching for your criteria, press
[Cancel]. If the machine finds some results before you press [Cancel], these
search results are displayed.
NOTE
If you press [Start Searching] without specifying any search criteria, all the
addresses stored on the LDAP server are displayed.
If the screen below is displayed:
• Press [User] ➞ enter the user name ➞ press [OK].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Press [Start Searching].
9
You can enter up to 128 characters for the user name.
The Network Password Entry screen is displayed if either one of the following
is true:
- If Login Information in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use', and <Display authentication
dialog when searching> is set to 'On'.
- If the user name, password, and domain name specified in Register LDAP
Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are
incorrect.
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
9-81
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
• Press [Password] ➞ enter the password ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 24 characters for the password.
You can also use
clear your entries.
-
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to
NOTE
For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks
(*****) on the Enter Network Password screen.
• Verify the settings ➞ press [OK].
9
The message <Searching…> appears for approximately two seconds on the
touch panel display.
The search results are displayed.
9-82
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
IMPORTANT
The number of search results displayed will not exceed the maximum limit set in
Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
If the desired destination is not displayed, either increase the maximum number of
addresses to search, or change the search conditions. (See "LDAP Server
Settings," on p. 10-66.)
❑ Select the destination that you want to store in the one-touch button from the
To continue searching, press [Back].
You cannot select multiple destinations.
If the desired destination is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired destination.
You can register the selected e-mail address for an I-fax address by pressing
[Register e-mail address for I-Fax]. To register e-mail addresses for I-fax
addresses, register one e-mail address at a time.
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, fax numbers that meet the
specified search criteria are also displayed.
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, you can restrict the type of
destinations displayed in the results list by pressing the Address Type
drop-down list.
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
9-83
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
search results ➞ press [Next].
9
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
NOTE
To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
❑ Store the selected destination.
If you want to store the selected address as an e-mail address:
• Verify the destination.
9
If necessary, edit the contents of the address.
9-84
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
• Press [One-touch Button Name] ➞ enter a name for the one-touch button ➞
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
press [OK].
If you want to register the selected address for an I-fax address:
• Verify the address.
9
If necessary, edit the contents of the address.
• Press [One-touch Button Name] ➞ enter a name for the one-touch button ➞
press [OK].
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
9-85
You can enter up to 12 characters for the one-touch button's name.
The information that can be obtained from the LDAP server consists of only
names and e-mail addresses.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
4
Press [OK].
In this example, an e-mail address is selected.
The contents you have stored appear on the display.
5
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
9
9-86
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
Erasing One-Touch Buttons
You can erase the destinations that you have stored in one-touch buttons.
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞
[One-touch Buttons].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Storing/Editing One-Touch
Buttons," on p. 9-60.
If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK]. (See "Address Book Password," on
p. 10-22.)
2
Select the one-touch button containing the destination(s) you
want to erase ➞ press [Erase].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
1
9
If the desired one-touch button is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired one-touch button.
Erasing One-Touch Buttons
9-87
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
If you know the one-touch button's three digit number, press [
] (One-Touch
Button Number) ➞ enter the three digit number of the desired one-touch button
using
(numeric keys).
IMPORTANT
Make sure that you verify the settings first before you erase them.
NOTE
• One-touch buttons that already have destinations stored in them are displayed with
a colored triangle ( ) in the lower right corner of the key.
• If you select a one-touch button that already has destinations stored in it, the
destinations are displayed.
3
Press [Yes].
9
To cancel erasing, press [No].
The message <Erased.> appears for approximately two seconds on the touch
panel display.
The destinations stored in the selected one-touch button are erased.
9-88
Erasing One-Touch Buttons
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
4
9
Erasing One-Touch Buttons
9-89
9
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
9-90
Erasing One-Touch Buttons
System Manager Settings
10
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the settings that can be made by the System Manager (the person in
charge of the machine).
System Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
E-Mail/I-Fax Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
Memory RX Inbox Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Manage/Access to Address Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Address Book Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-22
Access Number Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-24
Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Storing Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-26
When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the Forwarding Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-49
Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-60
Forwarding Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-62
Erasing Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-63
Printing Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-64
LDAP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Registering an LDAP Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-66
Changing an LDAP Server Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-80
Deleting an LDAP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-82
Printing LDAP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-83
10-1
System Settings Table
The following settings can be selected, stored or changed in System Settings from
the Additional Functions screen.
■ System Settings
Item
Settings
Applicable
Page
Communications
Settings
E-mail/I-Fax Settings
System Manager Settings
Maximum Data Size For
0 (Off), 1 to 99 MB; 3 MB*
Sending
Default Subject
40 characters maximum; Attached Image*
Full Mode TX Timeout
1 to 99 hours; 24 hours*
Print MDN/DSN on
Receipt
On, Off*
Always send notice for
RX errors
On*, Off
Use Send Via Server
On, Off*
p. 10-4
Memory RX Inbox Settings
10
Memory RX Inbox
Password
Seven digits maximum
Use I-Fax Memory Lock
On, Off*
p. 10-10
Memory Lock Start Time Everyday, Select Days, Off*
Memory Lock End Time
Everyday, Select Days, Off*
Manage/Access to
Address Book
Address Book Password
Seven digits maximum
p. 10-22
Access Number
Management
On, Off*
p. 10-24
An asterisk (*) indicates the default settings.
10-2
System Settings Table
■ System Settings Table Continued
Item
Applicable
Page
Settings
Forwarding Settings
Receive Type, Validate/Invalidate, Register,
Edit, Erase, Forward w/o Conditions, Print
List, E-mail Priority
p. 10-26
Register LDAP Server
Register, Edit, Erase, Print List
p. 10-66
An asterisk (*) indicates the default settings.
System Manager Settings
NOTE
For instructions on how to set the modes or settings not described in this manual, refer to
the other manuals listed in the front this Sending Guide. (See "Manuals for the Machine,"
on p. ii.)
10
System Settings Table
10-3
Communications Settings
This section describes the e-mail, I-fax, and Memory RX Inbox settings.
E-Mail/I-Fax Settings
You can change the e-mail and I-fax transmission settings. The available settings
are:
■ Maximum Data Size For Sending
Sets the maximum data size for outgoing e-mail messages and I-fax documents. If the
e-mail message send job exceeds this data size limit, it is split up into several e-mail
messages before being sent. However, I-fax transmissions that exceed the data size limit
are handled as errors, and are not sent.
System Manager Settings
■ Default Subject
The subject that you enter here is used as the default subject whenever you do not enter
a subject when sending a job.
■ Full Mode TX Timeout
Sets the time that elapses before sending operations terminate (automatically) if you do
not receive a notification e-mail (MDN) from the recipient when you send an I-fax in the
Full Mode.
■ Print MDN/DSN on Receipt
Sets whether to print notification e-mail messages that inform you of the successful
delivery of I-fax jobs sent using the Full Mode.
10
■ Always Send Notice for RX Errors
Sets whether to inform the sender that the e-mail message or I-fax was not received
successfully.
■ Use Send Via Server
Determines whether you can select to send jobs via the server on the screens specified or
on screen where you can store I-fax destinations.
10-4
Communications Settings
NOTE
The default settings are:
- Maximum Data Size For Sending: 3 MB
- Default Subject:
Attached Image
- Full Mode TX Timeout:
24 hours
- Print MDN/DSN on Receipt:
Off
- Always send notice for RX errors: On
- Use Send Via Server:
Off
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(ID).
2
Press [Communications Settings].
System Manager Settings
1
10
Communications Settings
10-5
System Manager Settings
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
3
Press [E-mail/I-Fax Settings].
4
Set the Maximum Data Size For Sending.
❑ Press [Maximum Data Size For Sending].
❑ Press [-] or [+] to specify the maximum data size for sending.
10
You can set the Maximum Data Size for Sending from 0 to 99 MB, in 1 MB
increments.
You can also use
your entries.
-
(numeric keys) to enter values, and
(Clear) to clear
You can change the value by pressing [-] or [+], even if you entered the value
using
(numeric keys).
10-6
Communications Settings
IMPORTANT
The maximum data size for sending must not be greater than the maximum data
size of the mail server.
5
Press [Subject].
6
Enter the default subject ➞ press [OK].
System Manager Settings
NOTE
• If you enter '0' MB as the data size, there is no size limit on the data that is sent.
• The maximum data size for sending can be set in 1 MB increments. If the size of an
e-mail exceeds the set limit, the e-mail is split up by page and sent out as smaller
e-mail messages, each of which is within the set limit. I-fax data that exceeds the
set limit is handled as an error, and is not sent.
10
You can enter up to 40 characters for the default subject.
NOTE
For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
Communications Settings
10-7
7
Set the Full Mode TX Timeout.
❑ Press [Full Mode TX Timeout].
❑ Press [-] or [+] to specify the Full Mode TX Timeout time.
You can set the Full Mode TX Timeout time from 0 to 99 hours, in 1 hour
increments.
System Manager Settings
You can also use
your entries.
-
(numeric keys) to enter values, and
(Clear) to clear
You can change the value by pressing [-] or [+], even if you have entered the
value using
(numeric keys).
If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter
an appropriate value appears on the screen.
8
Select [On] or [Off] for <Print MDN/DSN on Receipt>.
10
10-8
[On]:
Notification e-mail messages (MDN/DSN) that inform you of the
successful delivery of jobs are printed.
[Off]:
Notification e-mail messages (MDN/DSN) that inform you of the
successful delivery of jobs are not printed.
Communications Settings
Select [On] or [Off] for <Always send notice for RX errors>.
[On]:
If an error occurs, the sender is always informed of the details of the
error.
[Off]:
If an error occurs, the sender is not informed of the details of the error.
10 Select [On] or [Off] for <Use Send Via Server> ➞ press [OK].
System Manager Settings
9
10
[On]:
Enables you to set whether to use the Send Via Server setting as a
condition to send to I-Fax addresses.
[Off]:
Disables you to set whether to use the Send Via Server setting as a
condition to send to I-Fax addresses.
The selected mode is set.
11 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Communications Settings
10-9
Memory RX Inbox Settings
There may be occasions when you want to store all incoming documents into
memory until you are ready to print or send them. Locking the machine to receive
and store all documents in memory is called Memory Lock. After the memory lock
is turned 'On', the machine will automatically enter and leave the Memory Lock
mode at the times that you specify. The documents received when the machine is in
the Memory Lock mode are stored in memory until you unlock the memory with a
password and print or send them.
This section explains how to define a memory lock password, receive I-fax
documents in memory, and set the times for the machine to enter and leave the
Memory Lock mode.
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, you can also receive faxes into
memory. For instructions on storing received fax documents into memory, see
Chapter 11, "System Manager Settings," in the Facsimile Guide.
Setting the Memory RX Inbox Password
System Manager Settings
You can set a seven digit password for the Memory RX (Receive) Inbox, and restrict
its use to only those users who know the password.
NOTE
You can enter up to seven digits for the password. If you enter fewer than seven digits,
the machine stores the password with leading zeros.
- Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
1
10
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Communications Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "E-Mail/I-Fax Settings," on
p. 10-4.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
10-10
Communications Settings
Press [Memory RX Inbox Settings].
3
Press [Memory RX Inbox Password].
System Manager Settings
2
10
Communications Settings
10-11
4
Enter the desired password using
press [OK].
-
(numeric keys) ➞
If you do not want to set the Memory RX Inbox with a password, do not enter any
number.
You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.
System Manager Settings
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the password, press
entry.
5
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
10
10-12
(Clear) to clear your
Communications Settings
Storing Received I-Fax Documents in Memory
You can set the machine to store received I-fax documents in memory without
printing them. This is referred to as I-fax Memory Lock. You can later check the
received documents in the Memory RX Inbox, and print or send them.
NOTE
The default setting is 'Off'.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Communications Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "E-Mail/I-Fax Settings," on
p. 10-4.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(ID).
2
System Manager Settings
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
Press [Memory RX Inbox Settings] ➞ [Use I-Fax Memory
Lock].
10
Communications Settings
10-13
3
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
The selected mode is set.
System Manager Settings
IMPORTANT
If the message <I-Fax Memory RX is on.> does not appear, set the I-Fax Memory
Lock setting on the Memory RX Inbox screen from the Inbox Selection screen of
the Mail Box function to 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Storing Received Documents," in
the Mail Box Guide.)
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Memory Lock Start Time Settings
You can set Memory Lock to start automatically at a specified time.
NOTE
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, and Use Fax Memory Lock in Memory
RX Inbox Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) is set to 'On', faxes are automatically received into memory at the
Memory Lock Start Time set here.
• The default setting is 'Off'.
10
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Communications Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "E-Mail/I-Fax Settings," on
p. 10-4.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(ID).
10-14
Communications Settings
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
3
Press [Memory RX Inbox Settings] ➞ [Memory Lock Start
Time].
System Manager Settings
2
Select [Everyday], [Select Days], or [Off].
10
Communications Settings
10-15
● If you select [Everyday]:
❑ Select a number ([1] to [5]) ➞ enter the start time using
-
(numeric keys)
➞ press [OK].
You can store up to five different start times.
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples:
System Manager Settings
7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you make a mistake when entering the time, enter another four digit number.
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the time, you can also press
clear your entry.
(Clear) to
● If you select [Select Days]:
❑ Select a day of the week ([Sun] to [Sat]) ➞ select a number ([1] to [5]).
10
❑ Enter the start time using
10-16
Communications Settings
-
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK].
You can store up to five different start times for each day of the week.
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples:
7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you make a mistake when entering the time, enter another four digit number.
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the time, you can also press
clear your entry.
(Clear) to
● If you select [Off]:
If you select [Off], Memory Lock will not automatically turn on at a specified
time. You can manually turn Memory Lock On or Off by pressing [On] or [Off]
under <I-Fax Memory Lock> on the Memory RX Inbox screen from the Inbox
Selection screen of the Mail Box function. (See Chapter 4, "Storing Received
Documents," in the Mail Box Guide.)
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
You can select [Everyday] for Memory Lock Start Time, and [Select Days] for
Memory Lock End Time, and vice versa.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Communications Settings
10-17
System Manager Settings
❑ Press [OK].
10
Memory Lock End Time Settings
You can set Memory Lock to end automatically at a specified time.
NOTE
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, and Use Fax Memory Lock in Memory
RX Inbox Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) is set to 'On', fax memory reception automatically terminates at the
Memory Lock End Time set here.
• The default setting is 'Off'.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Communications Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "E-Mail/I-Fax Settings," on
p. 10-4.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(ID).
System Manager Settings
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
2
Press [Memory RX Inbox Settings] ➞ [Memory Lock End
Time].
10
10-18
Communications Settings
3
Select [Everyday], [Select Days], or [Off].
● If you select [Everyday]:
❑ Select a number ([1] to [5]) ➞ enter the end time using
-
(numeric keys)
System Manager Settings
➞ press [OK].
10
You can store up to five different end times.
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples:
7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you make a mistake when entering the time, enter another four digit number.
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the time, you can also press
clear your entry.
(Clear) to
Communications Settings
10-19
● If you select [Select Days]:
❑ Select a day of the week ([Sun] to [Sat]) ➞ select a number ([1] to [5]).
❑ Enter the end time using
-
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK].
You can store up to five different end times for each day of the week.
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples:
System Manager Settings
7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you make a mistake when entering the time, enter another four digit number.
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the time, you can also press
clear your entry.
10
10-20
Communications Settings
(Clear) to
● If you select [Off]:
❑ Press [OK].
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
You can select [Everyday] for Memory Lock Start Time, and [Select Days] for
Memory Lock End Time, and vice versa.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
System Manager Settings
If you select [Off], Memory Lock will not automatically turn on at a specified
time. You can manually turn Memory Lock On or Off by pressing [On] or [Off]
under <I-Fax Memory Lock> on the Memory RX Inbox screen from the Inbox
Selection screen of the Mail Box function. (See Chapter 4, "Storing Received
Documents," in the Mail Box Guide.)
10
Communications Settings
10-21
Manage/Access to Address Book
You can set the Address Book with a password and set access numbers to restrict
its use.
Address Book Password
You can set a password for the Address Book. If a password is set, restrictions can
be placed on the registering, editing, or erasing of destinations.
System Manager Settings
NOTE
You can enter up to seven digits for the password. If you enter fewer than seven digits,
the machine stores the password with leading zeros.
- Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Manage/Access to Address Book].
10
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
10-22
Manage/Access to Address Book
2
Enter the desired password using
press [OK].
-
(numeric keys) ➞
System Manager Settings
3
Press [Address Book Password].
10
If you do not want to set the Address Book with a password, do not enter a
number.
You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.
The password is set.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the password, press
entry.
4
(Clear) to clear your
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Manage/Access to Address Book
10-23
Access Number Management
You can set up a private address book using an access number. This feature
enables you to restrict other users from viewing and utilizing these special
addresses.
NOTE
The default setting is 'Off'.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Manage/Access to Address Book].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Address Book Password," on
p. 10-22.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(ID).
System Manager Settings
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
2
Press [Access Number Management].
10
10-24
Manage/Access to Address Book
3
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
The selected mode is set.
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
System Manager Settings
4
10
Manage/Access to Address Book
10-25
Forwarding Settings
You can set the machine to store received I-fax documents in Confidential Fax
Inboxes, or forward them to other machines or file servers. If a received document
matches the forwarding conditions, it is forwarded to the specified destination. This
section explains the conditions for forwarding, and how to register, change, and
erase forwarding destinations.
NOTE
• The maximum number of forwarding settings that you can store is 150.
• For instructions on forwarding documents received via the Fax function, see Chapter 11,
"System Manager Settings," in the Facsimile Guide.
System Manager Settings
Storing Forwarding Settings
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Forwarding Settings].
10
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
10-26
Forwarding Settings
3
Press [Register].
To recall the forwarding settings of a received document that
you have stored, press [1 Before], [2 Before], or [3 Before].
System Manager Settings
2
10
You can recall the last three forwarding settings.
The recalled forwarding settings are displayed.
IMPORTANT
• The forwarding settings are stored in memory if you press [OK] on the Register
screen or the Edit screen.
• Identical forwarding settings are stored only once in memory.
NOTE
• The three most recent forwarding settings that were stored in memory are not
erased even when the power is turned OFF.
• The forwarding settings of a received document that were not stored in memory are
not displayed even when you press the recall keys.
Forwarding Settings
10-27
Press [Condition Name].
5
Enter a name for the forwarding condition ➞ press [OK].
System Manager Settings
4
You can enter up to 50 characters for the condition name.
10
NOTE
• For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• If the Send Doc. Name is not specified, the first 24 characters of the condition
name are also stored as the document name. However, you can change the
document name at any time.
10-28
Forwarding Settings
7
Press [Forwarding Conditions].
Press the Receive Type drop-down list ➞ select [Fax] or
[I-Fax].
System Manager Settings
6
Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
10
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is not installed, this step is not necessary.
Forwarding Settings
10-29
8
Set the forwarding conditions.
● If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is not installed, or [I-Fax] is
selected as the receive type:
❑ Press the To, From, or Subject drop-down list.
System Manager Settings
The available forwarding conditions are:
10
[disregarded]:
Disregards the To, From, or Subject information as
forwarding conditions.
[equals]:
Forwards the document if the From or Subject
information matches all of the characters entered.
[differs from]:
Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject
information differs from the characters entered.
[begins with]:
Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject
information begins with the characters entered.
[ends with]:
Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject
information ends with the characters entered.
[contains]:
Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject
information contains the characters entered.
[does not contain]:
Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject
information does not contain the characters entered.
[equals] is not an option for <To>.
10-30
Forwarding Settings
❑ Select the forwarding condition ➞ press [Set.].
❑ If necessary, repeat this step for the other drop-down list(s).
If you want to change the criteria for the forwarding conditions without changing
the forwarding condition for the To, From, and Subject drop-down lists, press
[Set.] next to the criteria you want to change ➞ enter the new criteria ➞ press
[OK].
The forwarding conditions are set.
NOTE
• If [disregarded] is selected, you cannot enter any criteria for the forwarding
condition.
• For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• You can enter up to 128 characters for the To, From, or Subject forwarding criteria.
• If you want to select a Confidential Fax Inbox as the forwarding destination, set the
conditions as follows:
To:
[disregarded]
From:
[equals]
Subject: [disregarded]
Forwarding Settings
10-31
System Manager Settings
❑ Enter the forwarding criteria ➞ press [OK].
10
● If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, and [Fax] is selected
as the receive type:
❑ Select the Fax Number, Subaddress, or Password drop-down list.
The available forwarding conditions are:
System Manager Settings
[disregarded]:
Disregards the Fax Number information as a forwarding
condition.
[does not exist]:
The Subaddress or Password information does not exist.
[equals]:
Forwards the document if the Fax Number, Subaddress,
or Password information matches all of the characters
entered.
[differs from]:
Forwards the document if the Fax Number information
differs from the characters entered.
[begins with]:
Forwards the document if the Fax Number information
begins with the characters entered.
[ends with]:
Forwards the document if the Fax Number information
ends with the characters entered.
[contains]:
Forwards the document if the Fax Number information
contains the characters entered.
10
[does not contain]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information
does not contain the characters entered.
[does not exist] is not an option for <Fax Number>.
[does not exist] and [equals] are the only forwarding conditions that can be
selected for <Subaddress> and <Password>.
You cannot set the following combinations of conditions.
Fax Number
[disregarded]
10-32
Subaddress
[does not exist]
Password
[equals]
Other than [disregarded] [equals]
[equals]
Other than [disregarded] [does not exist]
[equals]
Other than [disregarded] [equals]
[does not exist]
Forwarding Settings
❑ Select the forwarding condition ➞ press [Set.] ➞ enter the forwarding criteria
using
▲
▲
[ ] [ ]:
-
(numeric keys).
Use to move the position of the cursor.
[Space]:
Press to insert a space between numbers.
[+]:
Press to insert a "+" sign between the country code and fax
number.
❑ If necessary, repeat this step for the other drop-down list(s).
If you want to change the criteria for the forwarding conditions without
changing the forwarding condition for the Fax Number, Subaddress, and
Password drop-down lists, press [Set.] next to the criteria you want to change
➞ enter the new criteria.
NOTE
• If [disregarded] or [does not exist] is selected, you cannot enter any criteria for the
forwarding condition.
• You can enter up to 20 characters for the Fax Number, Subaddress, or Password
forwarding criteria. The characters that can be entered are:
- Fax Number: 0 to 9, [Space], [+]
- Subaddress: 0 to 9,
,
, [Space]
- Password:
0 to 9,
,
, [Space]
• If you want to select a Confidential Fax Inbox as the forwarding destination, set the
conditions as follows. If you do not set any of the conditions, an error will occur.
- Fax Number: [disregarded]
Fax Number: [equals]
- Subaddress: [equals]
or Subaddress: [does not exist]
- Password:
[does not exist] or [equals]
Password:
[does not exist]
Forwarding Settings
10-33
System Manager Settings
[Backspace]: Press when you enter an incorrect number. The last number
entered is deleted, enabling you to enter the correct number.
10
9
Press [Done].
10 Press [Forwarding Destination] ➞ select [Address Book] or
System Manager Settings
[Conf. Fax Inbox].
10
[Address Book]:
Select to forward the received document to another machine
(relay function).
[Conf. Fax Inbox]: Select to store the received document in a Confidential Fax
Inbox.
10-34
Forwarding Settings
NOTE
• Documents received by I-fax, fax, and e-mail cannot be forwarded into User
Inboxes.
• If the selected destination is a group address which contains a User Inbox, as a
destination the document is not sent and stored in that User Inbox.
• [Conf. Fax Inbox] cannot be selected if you do not set the forwarding conditions in
step 8 as follows:
- I-fax:
To:
[disregarded]
From:
[equals]
Subject:
[disregarded]
- Fax (if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed):
Fax Number: [disregarded]
Fax Number: [equals]
Subaddress: [equals]
or Subaddress: [does not exist]
Password:
[does not exist] or [equals]
Password:
[does not exist]
● If you select [Address Book], and if Access Number Management is
set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is stored with
an access number or in a private address book:
System Manager Settings
❑ Press [Access Number].
10
Forwarding Settings
10-35
❑ Enter the access number using
-
(numeric keys) for the private address
book or destination ➞ press [OK].
If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with
the Access Number setting are displayed.
To cancel entering the Access Number, press [Cancel].
System Manager Settings
❑ Select the forwarding destination ➞ press [OK].
10
10-36
Forwarding Settings
● If you select [Address Book], and Access Number Management is
set to 'Off', and the destination is not stored with an access number
or in a private address book:
❑ Select the forwarding destination ➞ press [OK].
Press the alphabet keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the range of entries. Press the
same key again to return to the full address list.
If the desired destination is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired destination.
You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by
pressing the Type drop-down list.
Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books
(subaddress books 1 to 10, or one-touch buttons). Subaddress books
categorize the addresses stored in the Address Book. Select one of these
subaddress books to limit the display of destinations.
You can also specify a destination by searching through the directory listings
on a server on a network using LDAP. (See "Using a Server," on p. 2-38.)
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, you can also specify fax
numbers as forwarding destination.
NOTE
• To display [Access Number], set Access Number Management to 'On'. To access
the Access Number Management setting, press
(Additional Functions) ➞
[System Settings] ➞ [Manage/Access to Address Book] ➞ [Access Number
Management]. (See "Manage/Access to Address Book," on p. 10-22.)
• To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination ➞
press [Details].
• To be able to select a forwarding destination, it is necessary to register destinations
in the Address Book beforehand. (See "Storing New Addresses," on p. 9-5.)
Forwarding Settings
10-37
System Manager Settings
You cannot select multiple destinations. To forward to multiple destinations,
select a group address.
10
● If you select [Conf. Fax Inbox]:
❑ Select the desired Confidential Fax Inbox ➞ press [OK].
If the desired Confidential Fax Inbox is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to
scroll to the Confidential Fax Inbox.
You cannot select multiple Confidential Fax Inboxes.
System Manager Settings
IMPORTANT
• You cannot select a Confidential Fax Inbox that is already set with forwarding
conditions.
• Documents cannot be forwarded to Confidential Fax Inboxes in the following cases:
(The actual number given below may vary depending on the remaining capacity of
the hard disk.)
- When 100 documents have been stored in the selected inbox
- When a total of 1,000 documents or images have been stored in all of the inboxes
- When a total of approximately 3,700 pages of documents or images have been
stored in all of the inboxes
NOTE
It is recommended that you delete unwanted documents or image data from your
inbox to make space for storing new documents.
10
10-38
Forwarding Settings
11 Press [Send Doc. Name].
If you selected a Confidential Fax Inbox as the forwarding destination, proceed
to step 13.
System Manager Settings
12 Enter the name of the document ➞ press [OK].
10
The condition name is automatically entered as the document's name by default.
However, you can change this name.
You can enter up to 24 characters for the document's name.
You can also use
clear your entry.
-
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to
NOTE
For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
Forwarding Settings
10-39
13 Press [Forwarding Time].
System Manager Settings
14 Select [Everyday], [Select Days], or [Off].
IMPORTANT
The start time and end time cannot be set with the same time.
10
10-40
Forwarding Settings
● If you select [Everyday].
❑ Enter the start time and the end time using
-
(numeric keys) ➞ press
[OK].
You can set the start time and end time from 00:00 to 23:59.
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you want to specify the entire day, enter '00:00' as the start time, and '23:59'
as the end time.
The forwarding time is set.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the time, press
and enter another four digit number.
(Clear) to clear your entry,
System Manager Settings
Examples:
10
Forwarding Settings
10-41
● If you select [Select Days].
❑ Select a day of the week ([Sun] to [Sat]).
❑ Enter the start time and end time for the selected day using
-
(numeric
keys) ➞ press [OK].
You can set the start time and end time from 00:00 to 23:59.
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
System Manager Settings
Examples:
7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you press [All Day], the start and end time for the selected day of the week
are automatically set to '00:00' and '23:59' respectively.
The forwarding time is set.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the time, press
and enter another four digit number.
10
10-42
Forwarding Settings
(Clear) to clear your entry,
● If you select [Off].
❑ Press [OK].
The forwarding time is set.
15 Press the File Format drop-down list ➞ select the file format
System Manager Settings
of the document you want to forward.
10
The user can select the file format only in the case of sending e-mail or to a file
server.
This part of the procedure is not necessary if either of the following is true:
- An I-fax address is specified as the forwarding destination
- A User Inbox or Confidential Fax Inbox is specified as the forwarding
destination
- A fax number is specified as the forwarding destination (if the optional Super
G3 FAX Board is installed)
Forwarding Settings
10-43
File Formats:
[TIFF]:
Forwards images in the TIFF (Black-and-White) format.
[MTIFF]:
Enables you to insert multiple images into a single MTIFF file.
Forwards the file in the MTIFF (Black-and-White) format.
[PDF]:
Enables you to insert multiple images into a single PDF file. Forwards
the file in the PDF format regardless of the color mode.
NOTE
• In order to view a TIFF or MTIFF file, a software application that supports TIFF or
MTIFF file formats (such as Imaging for Windows) is required.
• In order to view a PDF file, Adobe Acrobat Reader is required.
• For more information on the different file formats, see "File Formats," in the
Glossary, on p. 13-12.
16 Press the Store/Print Received Doc. drop-down list ➞ select
System Manager Settings
[On] or [Off].
If you selected a Confidential Fax Inbox as the forwarding destination, this step is
not necessary.
10
[On]:
The received document is stored in the Memory RX Inbox or printed.
[Off]:
The received document is not stored in the Memory RX Inbox or printed.
NOTE
• If Store/Print Received Doc. is set to 'On' and Memory Lock is set to 'On', the
received document is stored in the Memory RX Inbox. (See "Storing Received
I-Fax Documents in Memory," on p. 10-13, and Chapter 6, "Receiving
Documents.")
• If Store/Print Received Doc. is set to 'On' and Memory Lock is set to 'Off', the
received document is printed. (See "Storing Received I-Fax Documents in
Memory," on p. 10-13, and Chapter 6, "Receiving Documents.")
10-44
Forwarding Settings
17 Press [Forwarding Done Notice].
18 Select the destination where the forwarding done notice is to
● If Access Number Management is set to 'On', and you want to select
a destination that is stored with an access number or in a private
address book:
❑ Press [Access Number].
System Manager Settings
be sent.
10
Forwarding Settings
10-45
❑ Enter the access number using
-
(numeric keys) for the private address
book or destination ➞ press [OK].
If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with
the Access Number setting are displayed.
To cancel entering the Access Number, press [Cancel].
System Manager Settings
❑ Select the destination ➞ press [OK].
10
10-46
Forwarding Settings
● If Access Number Management is set to 'Off', or the destination is
not stored with an access number or in a private address book:
❑ Select the destination ➞ press [OK].
You cannot select multiple destinations.
Press the alphabet keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the range of entries. Press the
same key again to return to the full address list.
If the desired destination is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired destination.
Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books
(subaddress books 1 to 10, or one-touch buttons). Subaddress books categorize
the addresses stored in the Address Book. Select one of these subaddress
books to limit the display of destinations.
NOTE
• To display [Access Number], set Access Number Management to 'On'. To access
the Access Number Management setting, press
(Additional Functions) ➞
[System Settings] ➞ [Manage/Access to Address Book] ➞ [Access Number
Management]. (See "Manage/Access to Address Book," on p. 10-22.)
• To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination ➞
press [Details].
• To be able to select a destination, for the forwarding done notice, it is necessary to
register destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See "Storing New
Addresses," on p. 9-5.)
Forwarding Settings
10-47
System Manager Settings
If you selected a Confidential Fax Inbox as the forwarding destination, this step is
not necessary.
10
19 Select whether to check [Notice Only for Errors].
If you want the forwarding done notice to be sent only when an error occurs,
press [Notice Only for Errors].
If you want the forwarding done notice to be sent every time a received
document is forwarded, do not press [Notice Only for Errors].
System Manager Settings
20 Press [OK].
10
The selected mode is set.
IMPORTANT
You cannot set to forward the same document to multiple Confidential Fax Inboxes
at the same time.
10-48
Forwarding Settings
21 If necessary, press the E-mail Priority drop-down list ➞ select
a priority for your forwarded e-mail messages.
This setting is necessary only if the forwarding destination is an e-mail address.
appears.
When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the
Forwarding Conditions
You can store the forwarding destinations of a received document if the forwarding
settings of the received document are not registered, or if the received document
does not match all of the forwarding conditions that you have specified.
IMPORTANT
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, and the subaddress and password
specified from the sending machine do not match the registered forwarding conditions,
the documents are not forwarded to forwarding destinations registered in Forward w/o
Conditions in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen), and the faxed documents are not received.
NOTE
• Forwarding destinations can be stored one at a time, according to the Receive Type of
the received document.
• A Confidential Fax Inbox cannot be specified as a forwarding destination when
forwarding destinations do not match the forwarding conditions.
Forwarding Settings
10-49
System Manager Settings
22 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
10
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Forwarding Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Storing Forwarding Settings," on
p. 10-26.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
Press [Forward w/o Conditions].
System Manager Settings
2
10
10-50
Forwarding Settings
3
Press the Receive Type drop-down list ➞ select [Fax] or
[I-Fax].
Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is not installed, this step is not necessary.
Press [Forwarding Destination].
System Manager Settings
4
10
Forwarding Settings
10-51
5
Select the forwarding destination.
● If Access Number Management is set to 'On', and you want to select
a destination that is stored with an access number or in a private
address book:
❑ Press [Access Number].
System Manager Settings
❑ Enter the access number using
-
(numeric keys) for the private address
book or destination ➞ press [OK].
10
If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with
the Access Number setting are displayed.
To cancel entering the Access Number, press [Cancel].
10-52
Forwarding Settings
❑ Select the forwarding destination ➞ press [OK].
● If Access Number Management is set to 'Off', or the destination is
not stored with an access number or in a private address book:
System Manager Settings
❑ Select the forwarding destination ➞ press [OK].
You cannot select multiple destinations.
Press the alphabet keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the range of entries. Press the
same key again to return to the full address list.
If the desired destination is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired destination.
You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by pressing
the Type drop-down list.
Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books
(subaddress books 1 to 10, or one-touch buttons). Subaddress books categorize
the address stored in the Address Book. Select one of these subaddress books
to limit the display of destinations.
You can also specify a destination by searching through the directory listings on
a server on a network using LDAP. (See "Using a Server," on p. 2-38.)
Forwarding Settings
10-53
10
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, you can also specify fax numbers
as forwarding destinations.
NOTE
• To display [Access Number], set Access Number Management to 'On'. To access
the Access Number Management setting, press
(Additional Functions) ➞
[System Settings] ➞ [Manage/Access to Address Book] ➞ [Access Number
Management]. (See "Manage/Access to Address Book," on p. 10-22.)
• To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination ➞
press [Details].
• To be able to select a forwarding destination, it is necessary to register destinations
in the Address Book beforehand. (See "Storing New Addresses," on p. 9-5.)
System Manager Settings
6
Press [Send Doc. Name].
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, and a fax number is specified as
the forwarding destination, proceed to step 9.
10
10-54
Forwarding Settings
7
Enter the name of the document ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 24 characters for the document's name.
-
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to
NOTE
For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
8
Press the File Format drop-down list ➞ select the file format
of the document you want to forward.
System Manager Settings
You can also use
clear your entry.
10
This part of the procedure is not necessary if either of the following is true:
- An I-fax address is specified as the forwarding destination
- A Fax number is specified as the forwarding destination (if the optional Super
G3 FAX Board is installed)
Forwarding Settings
10-55
File Formats:
[TIFF]:
Forwards images in the TIFF (Black-and-White) format.
[MTIFF]: Enables you to insert multiple images into a single MTIFF file. Forwards
the file in the MTIFF (Black-and-White) format.
[PDF]:
Enables you to insert multiple images into a single PDF file. Forwards
the file in the PDF format regardless of the color mode.
NOTE
• In order to view a TIFF or MTIFF file, a software application that supports TIFF or
MTIFF file formats (such as Imaging for Windows) is required.
• In order to view a PDF file, Adobe Acrobat Reader is required.
• For more information on the different file formats, see "File Formats," in the
Glossary, on p. 13-12.
Press the Store/Print Received Doc. drop-down list ➞ select
[On] or [Off].
System Manager Settings
9
10
[On]:
The received document is stored in the Memory RX Inbox or printed.
[Off]:
The received document is not stored in the Memory RX Inbox or printed.
NOTE
• If Store/Print Received Doc. is set to 'On' and Memory Lock is set to 'On', the
received document is stored in the Memory RX Inbox. (See "Storing Received
I-Fax Documents in Memory," on p. 10-13, and Chapter 6, "Receiving
Documents.")
• If Store/Print Received Doc. is set to 'On' and Memory Lock is set to 'Off', the
received document is printed. (See "Storing Received I-Fax Documents in
Memory," on p. 10-13, and Chapter 6, "Receiving Documents.")
10-56
Forwarding Settings
10 Press [Forwarding Done Notice].
11 Select the destination where the forwarding done notice is to
● If Access Number Management is set to 'On', and you want to select
a destination that is stored with an access number or in a private
address book:
❑ Press [Access Number].
System Manager Settings
be sent.
10
Forwarding Settings
10-57
❑ Enter the access number using
-
(numeric keys) for the private address
book or destination ➞ press [OK].
If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with
the Access Number setting are displayed.
To cancel entering the Access Number, press [Cancel].
System Manager Settings
❑ Select the destination ➞ press [OK].
10
10-58
Forwarding Settings
● If Access Number Management is set to 'Off', or the destination is
not stored with an access number or in a private address book:
❑ Select the destination ➞ press [OK].
You cannot select multiple destinations.
If the desired destination is not displayed, press [▼]or [▲] to scroll to the desired
destination.
Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books
(subaddress books 1 to 10, or one-touch buttons). Subaddress books categorize
the addresses stored in the Address Book. You can select one of these
subaddress books to limit the display of destinations.
NOTE
• To display [Access Number], set Access Number Management to 'On'. To access
the Access Number Management setting, press
(Additional Functions) ➞
[System Settings] ➞ [Manage/Access to Address Book] ➞ [Access Number
Management]. (See "Manage/Access to Address Book," on p. 10-22.)
• To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination ➞
press [Details].
• To be able to select a destination for the forwarding done notice, it is necessary to
register destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See "Storing New
Addresses," on p. 9-5.)
Forwarding Settings
10-59
System Manager Settings
Press the alphabet keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the range of entries. Press the
same key again to return to the full address list.
10
12 Select whether to check [Notice Only for Errors] ➞ press [OK].
If you want the forwarding done notice to be sent only when an error occurs,
press [Notice Only for Errors].
If you want the forwarding done notice to be sent every time a received
document is forwarded, do not press [Notice Only for Errors].
System Manager Settings
The selected mode is set.
13 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings
You can check or change forwarding settings that have been stored.
10
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Forwarding Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Storing Forwarding Settings," on
p. 10-26.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
10-60
Forwarding Settings
2
Select the forwarding setting whose details you want to check
➞ press [Edit].
If the desired forwarding setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired forwarding setting.
Check or change the forwarding settings ➞ press [OK].
System Manager Settings
3
10
Press [▼] or [▲] to display and check all of the specified forwarding conditions.
NOTE
For instructions on changing forwarding settings, see "Storing Forwarding
Settings," on p. 10-26.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Forwarding Settings
10-61
Forwarding Received Documents
You can set whether received documents are forwarded.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Forwarding Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Storing Forwarding Settings," on
p. 10-26.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
System Manager Settings
2
Select the desired forwarding setting ➞ press [Validate/
Invalidate].
10
If the desired forwarding setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired forwarding setting.
[Validate]:
The received document is forwarded to the specified destination if
it matches the forwarding conditions.
[Invalidate]: The received document is not forwarded to the specified
destination even if it matches the forwarding conditions.
To cancel forwarding, press [Validate/Invalidate] again.
The selected forwarding setting is enabled.
10-62
Forwarding Settings
3
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Erasing Forwarding Settings
You can erase forwarding settings that have been stored.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Forwarding Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Storing Forwarding Settings," on
p. 10-26.
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
2
Select the forwarding setting that you want to erase ➞ press
[Erase].
System Manager Settings
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(ID).
10
If the desired forwarding setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the
desired forwarding setting.
Forwarding Settings
10-63
3
Press [Yes].
To cancel erasing the forwarding setting, press [No].
The selected forwarding setting is erased.
System Manager Settings
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Printing Forwarding Settings
You can print a list of the stored forwarding settings.
1
10
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Forwarding Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Storing Forwarding Settings," on
p. 10-26.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(ID).
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired
setting.
10-64
Forwarding Settings
Press [Print List].
NOTE
The forwarding settings can be printed only if 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR (plain,
recycled, or color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in Other in
Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) are set to 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference
Guide.)
3
Press [Yes].
System Manager Settings
2
10
To cancel printing, press [No].
The forwarding settings are printed.
4
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Forwarding Settings
10-65
LDAP Server Settings
If the information for an LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) server is
registered in the machine, you can search for e-mail addresses through the LDAP
server. E-mail addresses obtained through the server can be specified as
destinations or stored in the Address Book.
System Manager Settings
NOTE
• The following types of LDAP servers can be used with this machine:
- Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory
- Novell NetWare 5.1 (NDS) or later
- Lotus Notes Domino R5 or later
For more information, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
• You can register up to a maximum of five LDAP servers.
Registering an LDAP Server
You have to specify the relevant information for the LDAP server, such as the server
name and address.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "E-Mail/I-Fax Settings," on p. 10-4.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(ID).
10
10-66
LDAP Server Settings
2
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Register LDAP Server] appears ➞ press
[Register LDAP Server].
Press [Register].
4
Press [Server Name].
System Manager Settings
3
10
LDAP Server Settings
10-67
5
Enter the server name ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 24 characters for the server name.
You can also use
clear your entry.
-
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to
System Manager Settings
NOTE
For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
6
Press [Server Address].
10
10-68
LDAP Server Settings
7
Enter the server's address ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 48 characters for the server's address.
-
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to
IMPORTANT
If <Login Information> is set to 'Use (security auth.)' for the LDAP server, and
Reverse DNS Lookup (a function that looks up the host name from the IP address)
is not supported, enter a host name and not an IP address.
NOTE
For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
8
Press [Location to Start Search].
System Manager Settings
You can also use
clear your entry.
10
If the server's LDAP version is 3, then you do not have to specify [Location to
Start Search]. (If the LDAP version is 3, the machine automatically retrieves
settings from the server, and sets the location to start searching.) If the server's
LDAP version is 2, you have to specify [Location to Start Search].
LDAP Server Settings
10-69
9
Enter the location to start searching ➞ press [OK].
Enter the location to start searching according to the type of LDAP server you are
using, or as described below.
• If you are using Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory:
System Manager Settings
Add "DC=" to each dot-separated series of characters in the Active Directory
domain name, and separate each series of characters by a comma.
Example: If <team1.salesdept.canon.co.jp> is the domain name in Active
Directory:
DC=team1, DC=salesdept, DC=canon, DC=co, DC=jp
• If you are using Novell NetWare 5.1 (NDS) or later:
Add the corresponding object class "o=", "ou=", or "c=" to each dot-separated
series of characters that configure the distinguished name, and separate each
series of characters by a comma.
Example: If <TEAM1.SALESDEPT.CANON> is the distinguished name in NDS:
ou=team1, ou=salesdept, o=canon
• If you are using Lotus Notes Domino R5 or later:
Enter the dn (Distinguished Name) of the node on the directory tree, such as
"ou=team1", "ou=salesdept", "o=canon", or "c=jp".
10
You can enter up to 128 characters for the location to start searching.
You can also use
clear your entry.
-
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and
(Clear) to
NOTE
For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
10-70
LDAP Server Settings
10 Select [On] or [Off] for <Use SSL> (Secure Socket Layer).
[On]:
SSL is used. Using SSL encodes the content of the communication and
ensures greater security.
[Off]:
SSL is not used.
-
System Manager Settings
11 Press [Port Number] ➞ enter the port number using
(numeric keys).
10
You can enter any port number from 1 to 65,535.
If you make a mistake when entering the port number, press
the correct number.
(Clear) ➞ enter
LDAP Server Settings
10-71
12 Press [Max. No. of Addresses to Search] ➞ enter the
maximum number of address to search using
(numeric keys).
-
You can enter any number from 1 to 1,000.
System Manager Settings
If you make a mistake when entering the number, press
correct number.
(Clear) ➞ enter the
13 Press [Search Timeout] ➞ enter the timeout time, in seconds,
using
-
(numeric keys) ➞ press [Next].
10
You can enter any timeout time from 30 to 300 seconds, in one second
increments.
If you make a mistake when entering the timeout time, press
your entry.
10-72
LDAP Server Settings
(Clear) to clear
IMPORTANT
• [Use (security auth.)] can be selected only if the LDAP server is running on
Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory.
• If you entered an IP address in step 7, and Reverse DNS Lookup (a function that
looks up the host name from the IP address) is not supported, select either [Do not
use] or [Use].
• If <Login Information> is set to 'Use (security auth.)', the machine may not be able
to connect to the LDAP server if Date & Time Settings in Timer Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is different from the time settings on the LDAP server.
NOTE
For instructions on entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
● If [Do not use] is selected:
❑ Select the Server LDAP version and character code ➞ press [OK].
System Manager Settings
14 Select [Do not use], [Use], or [Use (security auth.)].
10
UTF-8: Unicode
SJIS:
Shift JIS (Japan Industrial Standard)
LDAP Server Settings
10-73
EUC:
Extended Unix Code
JIS:
Japan Industrial Standard
ISO:
International Organization for Standardization
Select the LDAP version and character code according to the LDAP server's
environment.
● If [Use] is selected:
System Manager Settings
❑ Press [User].
❑ Enter the user name ➞ press [OK].
10
Enter the user name according to the type of LDAP server you are using, or as
described below:
• If you are using Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory:
Press [User] ➞ enter <Windows domain name/Windows user name>.
Example: If <team1> is the Windows domain name, and <user1> is the
Windows user name:
team1/user1
10-74
LDAP Server Settings
• If you are using Novell NetWare 5.1 (NDS) or later:
Press [User] ➞ add the corresponding object class "o=", "ou=", or "c=" to
each dot-separated series of characters that configure the distinguished
name, and separate each series of characters by a comma.
Example: If <user1.TEAM1.SALESDEPT.CANON> is the distinguished name
in NDS:
cn=user1, ou=team1, ou=salesdept, o=canon
• If you are using Lotus Notes Domino R5 or later:
Press [User] ➞ enter the dn (Distinguished Name) of the user:
Example: If <admin/team1/salesdept> is the distinguished name in Lotus
Notes Domino:
cn=admin, ou=team1, or o=salesdept
You can enter up to 128 characters for the user name.
System Manager Settings
❑ Press [Password].
❑ Enter the password ➞ press [OK].
10
You can enter up to 24 characters for the password.
After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks
(*****).
LDAP Server Settings
10-75
❑ Select [On] or [Off] for <Display authentication dialog when searching>.
[On]:
When searching for information on the server, a login information
dialog box is displayed even if a password is not required.
[Off]:
When searching for information on the server, a login information
dialog box is not displayed when a password is not required.
System Manager Settings
❑ Select the Server LDAP version and character code ➞ press [OK].
10
Select the LDAP version and character code according to the LDAP server's
environment.
10-76
LDAP Server Settings
● If [Use (security auth.)] is selected:
❑ Press [User].
System Manager Settings
❑ Enter the Windows user name ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 128 characters for the user name.
Example: If <user1> is the Windows user name:
10
user1
LDAP Server Settings
10-77
❑ Press [Password].
System Manager Settings
❑ Enter the password ➞ press [OK].
You can enter up to 24 characters for the password.
After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks
(*****).
10
❑ Press [Domain Name].
10-78
LDAP Server Settings
❑ Enter the domain name ➞ press [OK].
Enter the directory tree name of the Active Directory, such as
<team1.salesdept.canon.co.jp>.
You can enter up to 128 characters for the domain name.
❑ Select [On] or [Off] for <Display authentication dialog when searching> ➞
System Manager Settings
press [OK].
10
[On]:
When searching for information on the server, a login information
dialog box is displayed even if a password is not required.
[Off]:
When searching for information on the server, a login information
dialog box is not displayed when a password is not required.
The display returns to the Register LDAP Server screen.
15 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
LDAP Server Settings
10-79
Changing an LDAP Server Setting
You can change the settings for a stored LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol) server.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "E-Mail/I-Fax Settings," on p. 10-4.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(ID).
2
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Register LDAP Server] appears ➞ press
[Register LDAP Server].
System Manager Settings
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 2 of "Registering an LDAP Server," on
p. 10-66.
3
Select the LDAP server whose settings you want to change ➞
press [Edit].
10
The settings for the selected LDAP server are displayed.
10-80
LDAP Server Settings
4
Change the necessary settings ➞ press [Next].
5
Select [Do not use], [Use], or [Use (security auth.)] ➞ change
the settings for the selected mode ➞ press [OK].
System Manager Settings
NOTE
For instructions on changing the LDAP server settings, See "Registering an LDAP
Server," on p. 10-66.
10
The display returns to the Register LDAP Server screen.
6
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
LDAP Server Settings
10-81
Deleting an LDAP Server
You can delete a stored LDAP server.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "E-Mail/I-Fax Settings," on p. 10-4.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(ID).
2
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Register LDAP Server] appears ➞ press
[Register LDAP Server].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 2 of "Registering an LDAP Server," on
p. 10-66.
System Manager Settings
3
Select the LDAP server that you want to erase ➞ press
[Erase].
10
10-82
LDAP Server Settings
4
Press [Yes].
To cancel erasing the LDAP server, press [No].
5
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Printing LDAP Server Settings
You can print out the LDAP server settings.
NOTE
For more information on the Registered LDAP Server List, see "Registered LDAP Server
List," on p. 13-8.
1
10
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Registering an LDAP Server," on
p. 10-66.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(ID).
2
System Manager Settings
The selected LDAP server is erased.
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Register LDAP Server] appears ➞ press
[Register LDAP Server].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 2 of "Registering an LDAP Server," on
p. 10-66.
LDAP Server Settings
10-83
3
Press [Print List].
System Manager Settings
NOTE
The Registered LDAP Server List can be printed only if 11" x 17", LTR, or LTRR
(plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in
Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) are set to 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the
Reference Guide.)
4
Press [Yes].
10
To cancel printing, press [No].
The LDAP Server List is printed.
5
10-84
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
LDAP Server Settings
Printing Communication Reports
11
CHAPTER
This chapter explains the method of setting the contents of a communications report and
printing lists of the Send function.
Report Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Specifying Report Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Send TX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3
Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5
Printing Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Address Book List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-9
User's Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11
11-1
Report Settings Table
The following items can be stored or set in Report Settings from the Additional
Functions screen.
■ Settings
Item
Settings
Applicable
Page
Send
TX Report
For Error Only*, On, Off
Error Copy Print (Black Only): On*, Off
p. 11-3
Printing Communication Reports
Activity Report
Auto Print
On*, Off
Daily Activity Report
Time
On, Off*
Time Setting: 00:00 to 23:59
Send/Receive
Separate
(Not selected*)
p. 11-5
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
■ Print List
Item
Settings
Applicable
Page
Send
11
Address Book List
Address Book 1-10, One-touch Buttons
Print List: Print
p. 11-9
User's Data List
Print List
p. 11-11
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
NOTE
For instructions on how to set the modes or settings not described in this manual, refer to
the other manuals that come with this machine. (See "Manuals for the Machine," on p. ii.)
11-2
Report Settings Table
Specifying Report Settings
You can specify how the Send TX Report and the Activity Report are printed.
Send TX Report
NOTE
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, the results of fax transmissions are also
included in the Send TX Report. In addition, a Fax TX Report is printed together with the
Send TX Report. (See Chapter 12, "Printing Communication Reports," in the Facsimile
Guide.)
• For more information on Send TX Report, see "Send TX Report," on p. 13-3.
• The default settings are:
- TX Report:
For Error Only
- Error Copy Print: On
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Report Settings].
Printing Communication Reports
The Send TX Report enables you to check whether the documents were sent
correctly to the intended destination. A Send TX Report can automatically be
printed after the documents are sent. You can also set the machine to print a Send
TX Report only when a transmission error occurs. You can adjust the Send TX
Report setting to print the first part of the document as part of the report to remind
you of the document's contents.
11
Specifying Report Settings
11-3
Printing Communication Reports
2
Press [Send] under <Settings>.
3
Press [TX Report].
4
Select [For Error Only], [On], or [Off].
11
11-4
Specifying Report Settings
● If you select [For Error Only] or [On]:
❑ Select [On] or [Off] for <Error Copy Print (Black Only)> ➞ press [OK].
[On]:
Part of the sent document is printed on the report.
[Off]:
The contents of the sent document are not printed on the report at all.
The selected mode is set.
NOTE
Even if you select [On], the contents of the sent document are not printed on the
report if any one of the following conditions are true:
- When an I-fax address is not included in the destination
- When the images on the first page are not in black-and-white
● If you select [Off]:
❑ Press [OK].
No Send TX Report will be printed.
5
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Activity Report
The Activity Report is a printed log that shows the results of send and receive jobs.
You can set for the Activity Report to be printed at a specified time or be
automatically printed when the number of send and receive transmissions reaches
100. You can also set that the send and receive logs are printed separately.
An Activity Report can be printed manually from the System Monitor screen. (See
"Printing the Send Job Status/Log," on p. 7-14 and "Printing the Receive Job Log,"
on p. 7-19.
NOTE
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, a Fax Activity Report is printed together
with the Activity Report. (See Chapter 12, "Printing Communication Reports," in the
Facsimile Guide.)
• For an example of an Activity Report, see "Activity Report," on p. 13-5.
• The default settings are:
- Auto Print:
On
- Daily Activity Report Time: Off
- Send/Receive Separate:
(Not selected)
Specifying Report Settings
11-5
Printing Communication Reports
The selected mode is set.
11
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Report Settings] ➞ [Send]
under <Settings>.
Printing Communication Reports
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Send TX Report," on
p. 11-3.
2
Press [Activity Report].
3
Select [On] or [Off] for <Auto Print>.
11
11-6
[On]:
The Activity Report is automatically printed when the number of send and
receive transmissions reaches 100.
[Off]:
The Activity Report is not automatically printed when the number of send
and receive transmissions reaches 100.
Specifying Report Settings
4
Select [On] or [Off] for <Daily Activity Report Time>.
[On]:
The Daily Activity Report is printed at the specified time.
[Off]:
The Daily Activity Report Time setting is not specified.
● If you select [On]:
-
(numeric keys).
Printing Communication Reports
❑ Enter the time using
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
11
Examples:
7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If the number of send and receive transmissions exceeds 100 before the
specified time, an Activity Report of the most recent 100 transmissions is
printed.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the time, you can press
your entry.
(Clear) to clear
Specifying Report Settings
11-7
5
Select whether the send and receive logs should be printed
separately ➞ press [OK].
To print the send and receive logs separately, press [Send/Receive Separate] to
select it.
Printing Communication Reports
If it is not necessary to print the send and receive logs separately, do not press
[Send/Receive Separate].
The selected mode is set.
6
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
11
11-8
Specifying Report Settings
Printing Lists
You can print the contents of the Address Book or the Send settings specified from
the Additional Functions screen.
NOTE
The lists can be printed only if 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR (plain, recycled, or color
paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility For
APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are set to 'On'.
(See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
Address Book List
IMPORTANT
Even if Access Number Management in Manage/Access to Address Book in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', all the destinations in the
selected subaddress book are printed if you select it and press [Print List].
NOTE
For an example of an Address Book List, see "Address Book List," on p. 13-9.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Report Settings].
Printing Communication Reports
You can print the contents of the Address Book (subaddress book 1 to 10 or
one-touch buttons). This is useful for checking the details of the destinations.
11
Printing Lists
11-9
Printing Communication Reports
2
Press [Send] under <Print List>.
3
Press [Address Book List].
4
11
11-10
Printing Lists
Select one of the subaddress books or [One-touch Buttons] ➞
press [Print List].
5
Press [Yes].
To cancel printing, press [No].
6
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
User's Data List
You can print the contents of the Send settings specified from the Additional
Functions screen. This is useful for checking the details of the settings.
NOTE
For an example of the User's Data List, see "User's Data List," on p. 13-11.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Report Settings] ➞ [Send]
under <Print List>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Address Book List," on
p. 11-9.
Printing Lists
11-11
Printing Communication Reports
The Address Book List is printed.
11
Press [User's Data List].
3
Press [Yes].
Printing Communication Reports
2
To cancel printing, press [No].
The User's Data List is printed.
11
4
11-12
Printing Lists
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Troubleshooting
12
CHAPTER
This chapter describes procedures for taking corrective action in the event that trouble occurs.
The end of the chapter shows you how to respond to error messages and contains a list of
frequently asked questions and answers.
When Problems Occur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Sending Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-2
Receiving Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5
Other Situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-7
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Self-Diagnostic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-8
List of Error Codes without Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-12
Questions & Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
12-1
When Problems Occur
Sending Documents
To cancel transmissions.
Q
Do you want to cancel while the document is being scanned?
A
Press
display.
Q
Do you want to cancel after the document has been scanned?
A
Press [System Monitor] ➞ [Send] ➞ [Status] ➞ select the document that you
want to cancel ➞ press [Cancel] ➞ [Yes]. However, documents that are being
sent may not be canceled even if you press [Cancel]. (See "Using the System
Monitor Screen," on p. 1-44.)
(Stop) from the control panel, or press [Cancel] on the touch panel
Troubleshooting
Document cannot be sent.
12
12-2
Q
Is the destination setting correct?
A
Check the destination setting of the recipient.
Q
Is the destination stored in the Address Book correct?
A
Check the destination in the Address Book. (See "Editing Address Details," on
p. 9-50.)
Q
If you are sending an e-mail or I-fax, are the SMTP Server and DNS (Domain
Name System) Server settings correct?
A
Check the SMTP Server and DNS (Domain Name System) Server settings.
Q
If you are sending to a File Server, are the User and Password settings correct?
A
Check the User and Password settings, and send the document again.
Q
Has trouble occurred in the remote machine?
A
Check to ensure that the remote machine can receive documents. If it cannot,
check to see whether the machine is switched OFF, is out of recording paper, or
has insufficient available memory.
When Problems Occur
Document cannot be sent (if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed).
Q
Is the telephone line type set correctly?
A
Check the type of telephone line that has been set. (See Chapter 1,
"Introduction to Fax Functions," in the Facsimile Guide.)
Q
If sending with a Subaddress setting, did you enter the correct subaddress and
password for the destination that you are sending to?
A
Check the Subaddress and Password settings.
Memory is full.
Q
Are unwanted documents stored in memory?
A
Check the TX Document and RX Document memory, and erase unwanted
documents or error documents from memory. (See "Erasing Received
Documents," on p. 6-19, and Chapter 5, "Using/Arranging Documents Stored in
an Inbox," in the Mail Box Guide.)
The document does not print clearly on the remote machine.
Q
Is the platen glass clean?
A
Use your machine to make a copy of the document, and check it for streaks. If
streaks appear, clean the platen glass. (See Chapter 7, "Routine Maintenance,"
in the Reference Guide.)
Q
Is the Exposure setting set towards ' ' and the Original Type setting set to
'Photo'?
A
Change the Exposure setting to ' ' and the Original Type setting to 'Text', and
send the document again. (See "Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings," on
p. 3-17.)
Troubleshooting
The density of the documents sent to a remote machine is too light.
12
When Problems Occur
12-3
The machine will not transmit using a subaddress (if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is
installed).
Q
Are the subaddress and password of the remote machine specified correctly?
A
Check to see if the machine has a subaddress function.
A
Check with the remote party to see if the specified subaddress and the RX
password at both this machine and the remote machine are the same.
Q
Has trouble occurred in the remote machine (fax)?
A
Check to ensure that the remote machine can receive documents. If it cannot,
check to see if there is sufficient available memory.
Q
Are the subaddress and password stored in the destination list correct?
A
Check the stored entries of the destination list.
The remote fax is slow to switch over to the receiving mode, and errors always occur (if the
optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed).
Is a pause inserted in the fax number?
A
If you are sending to a machine that takes time to switch over for fax receiving,
insert a pause after the destination's fax number.
Troubleshooting
Q
12
12-4
When Problems Occur
Receiving Documents
The machine does not receive documents.
Q
Does the machine have sufficient memory?
A
Erase unwanted documents and documents with errors from memory in order
to increase the amount of available memory. (See "Erasing Received
Documents," on p. 6-19, and Chapter 5, "Using/Arranging Documents Stored in
an Inbox," in the Mail Box Guide.)
Q
Are the network settings specified?
A
Documents cannot be received if the network settings are not specified.
Confirm this with your System Manager.
The machine does not receive documents (if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed).
Q
Is the receive password set in your machine?
A
If Received Password is set in Fax Settings in Communications Settings in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), documents can be
received only from senders that use the correct password. Confirm this with
your System Manager. (See Chapter 11, "System Manager Settings," in the
Facsimile Guide.)
Q
Is there sufficient available memory?
A
Erase unwanted documents and documents with errors from memory in order
to increase the amount of available memory. (See "Erasing Received
Documents," on p. 6-19, and Chapter 5, "Using/Arranging Documents Stored in
an Inbox," in the Mail Box Guide.)
A
Erase unwanted documents from the Memory RX Inbox. (See "Erasing
Received Documents," on p. 6-19.)
Troubleshooting
Documents cannot be received in memory.
12
Quality of printed originals is uneven.
Q
Is the platen glass of the sender's machine clean?
A
Make a few copies using your machine. If the copies are not streaked, the
problem is in the sending party's machine. Contact the sender and ask them to
send the document again.
When Problems Occur
12-5
Documents cannot be received in the Confidential Fax Inboxes.
Are the forwarding conditions in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from
the Additional Functions screen) set correctly?
A
Check the Forwarding Conditions and inform the sender of those settings. (See
"Forwarding Settings," on p. 10-26.)
Q
Are the Forwarding Settings set to 'On' using [Validate/Invalidate]?
A
The Forwarding Settings must be set to 'On' to be effective. (See "Forwarding
Settings," on p. 10-26.)
Q
Is there sufficient available memory?
A
Erase unwanted documents and documents with errors from memory in order
to increase the amount of available memory. (See "Erasing Received
Documents," on p. 6-19, and Chapter 5, "Using/Arranging Documents Stored in
an Inbox," in the Mail Box Guide.)
A
Erase unwanted documents from the Confidential Fax Inbox. (See "Erasing
Received Documents," on p. 6-19.)
Troubleshooting
Q
12
12-6
When Problems Occur
Other Situations
Transmissions are slow.
Q
Are documents being sent at a high resolution?
A
It is recommended that you send text only documents at a low resolution.
Transmissions are slow (if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed).
Q
Is the ECM TX or ECM RX Fax mode setting active?
A
Check the ECM TX and ECM RX settings. (See Chapter 9, "Customizing
Communication Settings," in the Facsimile Guide.)
Q
If your fax is connected to a rotary pulse line, is the fax set for tone dialing?
A
In the case of a rotary pulse line, you must set the fax for tone dialing in order to
use fax information services. (See Chapter 7, "Special Fax Functions," in the
Facsimile Guide.)
Q
Did you receive an instruction from the sender to set the fax to receive?
A
Press [RX Start]. (See Chapter 7, "Special Fax Functions," in the Facsimile
Guide.)
Documents cannot be sent overseas (error code #18) (if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is
installed).
Q
Is a pause inserted in the fax number?
A
Insert a pause after the access number of the telephone company that you want
to use to perform international communication, or after the fax number of the
other party, then dial the number again. (See Chapter 2, "Basic Sending
Methods," in the Facsimile Guide.)
A
Change the Long Distance setting on the Option screen if you are sending
documents using the destination list in the Address Book. To access the Long
Distance setting, press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞
[Register Address] ➞ [Register New Address] ➞ [Fax] ➞ [Option]. (See
Chapter 10, "Storing/Editing Address Book Settings," in the Facsimile Guide.)
When Problems Occur
12-7
Troubleshooting
Cannot use fax information services (if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed).
12
Error Messages
This section explains the various messages that appear on the touch panel display,
along with possible causes and remedies.
For explanations of messages that are not listed here, see the Reference Guide,
Facsimile Guide, and Network Guide.
Self-Diagnostic Display
Perform the necessary procedures according to the displayed self-diagnostic error
message.
Self-diagnostic error messages appear on the touch panel display at the following
times:
• When
scanning or printing cannot be performed because of an operational error
• When
you need to make a decision or take some action during scanning or
printing
• When
you need to make a decision or take some action while browsing the
network
Troubleshooting
The following is a list of self-diagnostic error messages, along with their possible
causes and remedies.
Out of resources. Wait for a moment, then perform operation again.
12
Cause
You cannot browse the network due to a lack of TCP/IP resources. This may be
because documents have just been continuously sent or are being continuously
sent through FTP or Windows (SMB).
Remedy
Wait for a while, and try browsing again.
Set the IP Address.
12-8
Cause
This machine is not set with an IP address.
Remedy
Specify the IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), then turn the
machine's main power OFF and back ON again.
Error Messages
No response from the server. Check the settings.
Cause
The specified server settings are incorrect, or the server is not turned ON.
Alternatively, the machine's TCP/IP resources may be low.
Remedy
Wait for a while, and try browsing again. If you still fail, try selecting another
server.
NetWare is in use. Wait for a moment, then perform operation again.
Cause
You cannot browse the network because NetWare is printing through a PServer
or NDS PServer.
Remedy
Wait until printing is complete, and try browsing again.
There are too many sub directories.
Cause
You have exceeded the maximum number of subdirectory levels allowed.
Remedy
The directory level that you are trying to access cannot be specified. Specify a
different destination.
Cause 1
The server was not running when you tried to send.
Remedy
Check the destination.
Cause 2
The network connection was lost when you tried to send. (Either you could not
connect to the destination or the connection was lost before the job could
complete.)
Remedy
Check the status of the network.
Cause 3
You tried to send through NetWare, but the Tree name was not entered.
Remedy
Enter the Tree name.
Cause 4
A TCP/IP error occurred when you tried to send an e-mail or I-fax.
Remedy
Check that the network cables and connectors are properly connected.
12
Check the TCP/IP.
Cause
The machine's TCP/IP is not operating.
Remedy
Check the IP Address Settings (IP Address, DHCP, RARP, BOOTP) in TCP/IP
Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen). (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.)
Error Messages
Troubleshooting
No response.
12-9
Cannot find the selected server. Check the setting.
Cause 1
The IP address that the machine should connect to cannot be determined.
Remedy 1 Check the DNS (Domain Name System) Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in
Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
(See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.)
Remedy 2 Check whether the DNS (Domain Name System) server's DNS settings are
correct.
Cause 2
If Login Information in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use (security auth.)' for the LDAP server,
the machine will not be able to determine the host name.
Remedy
Check the DNS (Domain Name System) Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in
Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
(See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.)
Cannot connect to the selected server. Check the settings.
Cause
Cannot connect to the specified IP address/port.
Remedy 1 Check the Gateway Address setting in IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings
in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
(See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.)
Remedy 2 Check the Server Address and Port Number in Register LDAP Server in System
settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Registering an LDAP
Server," on p. 10-66.)
Troubleshooting
Remedy 3 Check whether the LDAP server is operating normally.
Remedy 4 If Login Information in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use (security auth.)' for the LDAP server,
check whether UDP packages are blocked by the filter.
12
12-10
Error Messages
Check the user name and password or check settings.
Cause 1
When setting the Login Information of the LDAP server to 'Use' or 'Use (security
auth.)', the user name or password is incorrect.
Remedy
Check the User and Password settings when Login Information in Register
LDAP server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to
'Use' or 'Use (security auth.)'. (See "Registering an LDAP Server," on p. 10-66.)
Cause 2
When setting the Login Information of the LDAP server to 'Use' or 'Use (security
auth.)', the domain name is incorrect.
Remedy
Check the Domain Name setting when Login Information in Register LDAP
Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use
(security auth.)'. (See "Registering an LDAP Server," on p. 10-66.)
Cannot complete searching due to timeout. Check the settings.
Cause
The search could not complete within the time specified under [Search
Timeout].
Remedy
Increase the time setting for Search Timeout in Register LDAP Server in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Registering an
LDAP Server," on p. 10-66.)
The number of search results has exceeded limits. Change search conditions and try again.
The number of addresses that meet the search criteria exceeds the specified
maximum number of addresses to search.
Remedy 1 Narrow down the search criteria, and then search again.
Remedy 2 Increase the maximum number of addresses to search. (See "Registering an
LDAP Server," on p. 10-66.)
Cannot start searching because the version setting for the server is incorrect. Check the
settings.
Cause
Although 'ver. 3' is set in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen), the LDAP server is running on version 2.
Remedy
Set Server LDAP version and character code in Register LDAP Server in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'ver. 2'. (See
"Registering an LDAP Server," on p. 10-66.)
Error Messages
12-11
Troubleshooting
Cause
12
List of Error Codes without Messages
If an error occurs while a document is being sent or received, an error code is
displayed on the job log on the System Monitor screen, as well as being included in
the various reports. Check what the error code is and take the required steps to
solve the problem. (See "Report and List Samples," on p. 13-2, and Chapter 8,
"Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status," in the Facsimile Guide.)
# 001
Cause
Paper or originals are jammed.
Remedy
Remove any jammed paper or originals. (See Chapter 8, "Troubleshooting," in
the Reference Guide.)
# 003
Cause
Communications that take longer than the preset time (64 minutes) caused the
error.
Remedy 1 Reduce the resolution, and try sending the document again. (See "Resolution,"
on p. 3-15.)
Remedy 2 When receiving a document, ask the remote party to either reduce the
resolution at which the document is scanned, or divide the document into two or
more parts before sending it.
Troubleshooting
# 005
Cause 1
The other party did not answer within 35 seconds.
Remedy
Confirm that the remote machine is able to communicate, and try again.
Cause 2
The receiving machine is not a G3 fax.
Remedy
Check the type of receiving machine with the receiving party.
# 009
12
12-12
Cause 1
There is no paper.
Remedy
Load paper. (See Chapter 7, "Routine Maintenance," in the Reference Guide.)
Cause 2
The paper drawer is not correctly inserted into the machine.
Remedy
Insert the paper drawer properly.
Error Messages
# 011
Cause
The document that you are sending is not placed correctly.
Remedy
Repeat the whole procedure from the beginning.
# 012
Cause
The document could not be sent because the receiving fax machine was out of
paper.
Remedy
Ask the receiving party to load paper into their fax machine.
# 018
Cause 1
The receiving machine did not respond when your machine redialed.
Remedy
Confirm that the receiving machine is able to communicate, and try again.
Cause 2
The documents could not be sent because the receiving machine was
engaged.
Remedy
Confirm that the receiving machine is able to communicate, and try again.
Cause 3
The settings on your machine do not match the settings on the receiving
machine.
Remedy
Confirm that the receiving machine is able to communicate, and try again.
Cause 1
Forwarding could not be performed because all the addresses stored under the
specified Group destination have been deleted or User Inboxes are specified as
the Group destination.
Remedy
Try sending again.
Cause 2
Transmission could not be performed because the specified destination was
deleted while the send documents were waiting to be sent.
Remedy
Try sending again.
Error Messages
12-13
Troubleshooting
# 022
12
# 037
Cause
Documents could not be received because there was insufficient memory
available.
Remedy
Erase unwanted documents and documents with errors from memory in order
to increase the amount of available memory. (See "Erasing Received
Documents," on p. 6-19, and Chapter 5, "Using/Arranging Documents Stored in
an Inbox," in the Mail Box Guide.)
# 080
Cause
A subaddress is not set in the remote machine.
Remedy
Check the subaddress of the remote machine, and try again.
# 081
Cause
A password is not set in the remote machine.
Remedy
Check the password of the remote machine, and try again.
# 099
Cause
Sending was interrupted.
Remedy
Try sending again.
Troubleshooting
# 102
Cause
The subaddress and/or password do not match.
Remedy
Check the subaddress and/or password of the remote machine, and try again.
# 107
Cause
12
The document could not be sent because there was insufficient memory
available.
Remedy 1 Resend the document at a lower resolution.
Remedy 2 Erase unwanted documents in order to make memory available.
Remedy 3 If this problem occurs frequently, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
12-14
Error Messages
# 701
Cause
The specified Department ID does not exist, or the password has changed.
Remedy
Enter the correct Department ID or password using
the control panel, and try sending again.
-
(numeric keys) on
# 702
Cause
The document could not be sent because memory is full.
Remedy 1 Wait for a few moments and try again after other send jobs are complete.
Remedy 2 Do not send the document to too many recipients at the same time. Divide up
the recipients and send the document to a smaller number of recipients each
time.
# 703
Cause
The memory for the image data is full.
Remedy 1 Wait for a few moments and try again after other send jobs are complete.
Remedy 2 Erase documents stored in inboxes. If the machine still does not operate
normally, turn the main power OFF and then back ON again.
Cause
An error occurred while reading address information from the Address Book.
Remedy
Check the address settings. If the machine still does not operate normally, turn
the main power OFF and then back ON again.
# 705
Cause
Remedy
The send operation was interrupted because the size of the image data is larger
than the Maximum Data Size for Sending set in E-mail/I-Fax Settings in
Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen).
Change the setting for the Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax
Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen). Select a lower resolution, or if you are using I-fax, decrease
the number of pages containing images that you are sending each time, so that
you do not exceed the Maximum Data Size for Sending.
Error Messages
12-15
Troubleshooting
# 704
12
# 706
Cause
The Address Book is being imported or exported from the Remote UI, or it is
being used by another sending component.
Remedy
Try sending again.
# 711
Cause
The inbox memory is full.
Remedy
Erase the unnecessary documents stored in the inbox. (See "Erasing Received
Documents," on p. 6-19, and Chapter 5, "Using/Arranging Documents Stored in
an Inbox," in the Mail Box Guide.)
# 712
Cause
The maximum number of documents is already stored in the inbox.
Remedy
Erase the unnecessary documents stored in the inbox. (See "Erasing Received
Documents," on p. 6-19, and Chapter 5, "Using/Arranging Documents Stored in
an Inbox," in the Mail Box Guide.)
Troubleshooting
# 751
Cause
The server is not functioning. The network is down (unable to connect to the
network or was disconnected).
Remedy
Check the recipient's address.
Check that the network is up.
# 752
12
12-16
Cause
The SMTP server name for e-mail or I-fax is not correct, or the server is not
functioning.
The domain name or e-mail address may not be set.
The network is down.
Remedy
Check the SMTP Server name and E-mail Address in E-mail/I-Fax in Network
Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
Check that the SMTP server is operating properly.
Check the network status.
Error Messages
# 753
Cause
A TCP/IP error occurred while sending e-mail. (Socket, Select error, etc.)
Remedy
Check the network cables and connectors. If the machine still does not operate
normally, turn the main power OFF and then back ON again.
# 754
Cause
The server is not functioning or the network is down.
The destination setting is not correct.
Remedy
Check the server and network.
Check the destination's address settings.
Cause 1
You cannot send jobs because TCP/IP is not functioning correctly.
Remedy
Check the TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen).
Cause 2
The IP address is not set.
Remedy
Check the TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen).
Cause 3
When the machine was turned ON, an IP address was not assigned to the
machine by the DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP server.
Remedy
Check the TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen).
# 756
Cause
NetWare in NetWare Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off'.
Remedy
Turn the NetWare setting to 'On'.
Troubleshooting
# 755
12
Error Messages
12-17
# 801
Cause 1
A timeout error occurred while the machine is communicating with the SMTP
server to send e-mail or send/receive an I-fax.
Remedy 1 Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally.
Remedy 2 Check the network status.
Cause 2
The SMTP server returned an error while trying to connect. The destination is
not correct. An error occurred on the server side during transmission to a file
server.
Remedy 1 Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally.
Remedy 2 Check the network status.
Remedy 3 Check the destination setting.
Troubleshooting
Remedy 4 Check the status and setting of the file server.
Cause 3
You are sending a file to a destination to which you have no write permission.
Remedy
Check the destination setting.
Cause 4
When the machine tried to send a file to the server, a file with the same name
already exists on the FTP server and that file cannot be overwritten.
Remedy
Change the setting on the file server to allow overwriting.
Cause 5
When the machine tried to send a file to the server, either the folder name is
incorrectly specified or the password is wrong.
Remedy
Check the destination setting.
# 802
Cause
The names of the SMTP Server in E-mail/I-Fax and DNS (Domain Name
System) Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are incorrect.
The DNS (Domain Name System) server name is not correct. (See Chapter 3,
"Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.)
Connection to the DNS (Domain Name System) server failed.
Remedy
Check the names of the SMTP Server in E-mail/I-Fax and DNS (Domain Name
System) Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
Check that the DNS (Domain Name System) server is functioning normally.
12
12-18
Error Messages
# 803
Cause
The connection was interrupted due to reasons on the recipient's side before all
the pages could be sent.
Remedy
Try sending again.
# 804
Cause 1
Unable to match the specified directory name when sending data to a file
server.
Remedy
Check the destination.
Cause 2
You have no permission to access the folder.
Remedy
Change the setting on the server side to enable access to the folder.
# 806
An incorrect user name or password was specified for the sending of a file to a
file server.
Remedy
Change the user name or password.
Cause 2
An incorrect destination was specified for the sending of an e-mail or I-fax.
Remedy
Check the destination of the e-mail or I-fax.
Troubleshooting
Cause 1
12
Error Messages
12-19
# 810
Cause 1
A POP server connection error occurred when receiving an I-fax.
Remedy
Check the POP Server name in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in Systems
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally.
Check the network status.
Cause 2
The POP server returned an error during the connection.
Remedy
Check the POP Server name in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in Systems
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally.
Check the network status.
Cause 3
A timeout error occurred on the server side during the connection to the POP
server.
Remedy
Check the POP Server name in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in Systems
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally.
Check the network status.
Troubleshooting
# 815
Cause
You cannot log on to the file server because the machine is printing a document
sent to that server. Simultaneous connections are not possible.
Remedy
Wait for a few moments before trying to send the data again, or change the
NetWare server you are sending to. Alternatively, stop the Pserver.
# 818
12
Cause
The received data is not in a printable file format.
Remedy
Ask the sender to change the file format and resend the data.
# 819
12-20
Cause
You have received data that cannot be processed (MIME information is
incorrect).
Remedy
Check the settings and ask the sender to resend the data.
Error Messages
# 820
Cause
You have received data that cannot be processed (BASE 64 or unencode is
incorrect).
Remedy
Check the settings and ask the sender to resend the data.
# 821
Cause
You have received data that cannot be processed (TIFF analysis error).
Remedy
Check the settings and ask the sender to resend the data.
# 822
Cause
You have received data that cannot be processed (image data cannot be
decoded).
Remedy
Check the settings and ask the sender to resend the data.
# 827
Cause
You have received data that cannot be processed (contains MIME information
that is not supported).
Remedy
Check the settings and ask the sender to resend the data.
Cause
You have received HTML data.
Remedy
Ask the sender to use a file format other than HTML, and to resend the data.
# 829
Cause
Data that contains more than 1,000 pages is received.
Remedy
This machine can print or store up to 999 pages of data in memory, but will
delete any data over that amount. Ask the sender to resend the remaining
pages.
Error Messages
12-21
Troubleshooting
# 828
12
# 830
Cause
A DSN (Delivery Status Notifications) error notification is received because of
an incorrect I-fax address or destination setting, or the data size of the sent
documents exceeded the mail server capacity.
Remedy 1 Check the I-fax address or destination setting.
Remedy 2 Set the Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax Settings in
Communication Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) so that it is less
than the mail server capability.
Remedy 3 Check the status of the mail server, DNS (Domain Name System) server, and
network.
# 831
Cause
An I-fax document could not be received using SMTP because of the RX/Print
Range setting in IP Address Range Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network
Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
Remedy
Reset the RX/Print Range setting in IP Address Range Settings in TCP/IP
Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen).
# 832
Troubleshooting
Cause
DSN (Delivery Status Notifications) mail was not sent because TCP/IP Settings
or E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) have not been set or trouble has occurred at the mail server.
Remedy 1 Check the DNS (Domain Name System) Server Settings and IP Address
Settings in TCP/IP settings, and E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
Remedy 2 Check the status of the mail server and DNS (Domain Name System) server.
# 833
12
Cause
MDN (Mail Delivery Notification) mail was not sent because TCP/IP Settings or
E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) have not been set or trouble has occurred at the mail server.
Remedy 1 Check the DNS (Domain Name System) Server Settings and IP Address
Settings in TCP/IP settings, and E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
Remedy 2 Check the status of the mail server and DNS (Domain Name System) server.
12-22
Error Messages
# 834
Cause
An MDN error notification is received because of an incorrect I-fax address or
destination setting, or trouble has occurred in the network or mail server.
Alternatively, the memory of the receiving machine is full.
Remedy
Check the I-fax address and destination settings.
# 835
Cause
The maximum number of text lines for receiving an I-fax has been exceeded.
Remedy
Ask the sender to reduce the amount of text data in the body of the document,
and resend the data.
# 851
Cause 1
There is insufficient remaining memory in the system.
Remedy
Check the system's available memory, and delete unwanted documents in the
inboxes.
Cause 2
The scanned document cannot be stored because there are more than 100
documents in the specified inbox.
Remedy
If there are a large number of documents, delete them from the specified inbox.
Cause
An error occurred because the main power switch was turned OFF while a job
was being processed.
Remedy
Check to see if the main power switch is turned ON. Try processing the job
again, if necessary.
# 899
Cause
The e-mail or I-fax has been successfully sent, but reception may be incomplete
because transmission was relayed via multiple servers.
Remedy 1 Confirm whether reception was complete.
Remedy 2 Check if you received an error notification.
Error Messages
12-23
Troubleshooting
# 852
12
# 995
Reserved communication jobs were cleared.
Remedy
Reserve the jobs again, if necessary.
Troubleshooting
Cause
12
12-24
Error Messages
Questions & Answers
Q
Can the machine automatically resend documents when there are errors in
transmission?
A
Specify the Retry Times setting. To access the Retry Times setting, press
(Additional
Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings] ➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞
[▼] ➞ [Retry Times]. (See "Number of Retry Attempts," on p. 8-10.)
Q
What happens to documents that are sent to my machine while the power switch on the
control panel is turned OFF?
A
These documents are automatically stored and printed when all documents have been
received.
Q
A
What happens if I-fax documents arrive when the machine is being used for copying?
Q
I frequently send documents using the same settings. Can the machine be set to
automatically restore those settings when the power is turned ON or after an operation
completes?
A
You can store the desired settings as a Favorites Button and recall them as needed.
Alternatively, you can set the desired settings as the Standard Send Settings so that
they are always specified when the machine is turned ON or after an operation
completes.
Troubleshooting
While you are making copies, the documents are automatically received and stored in
the machine's memory, and will be printed automatically when you finish copying.
You can change the order in which these documents print. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing
Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
12
Q
A
What happens to received documents if a paper jam occurs while they are printing?
If documents are not printed correctly, they are held in memory. When the paper jam is
cleared, printing resumes from the page at which the paper jam occurred.
Questions & Answers
12-25
Troubleshooting
12
12-26
Q
What happens to a document that has not been completely received when a blackout
occurs?
A
The document, up to the page that was successfully received, is printed.
Q
What happens to documents in memory and the memory settings if power is
interrupted?
A
Documents that are stored in the system's memory remain in memory even when power
to the machine is interrupted. Similarly, the contents of the Address Book are also stored
permanently in memory. However, if power is interrupted while a document is being
received, it is not stored in memory.
Q
A
How can I save paper?
Q
A
Can I turn the machine's power OFF if a document is set with the Delayed Send setting?
Q
A
Can I change the data size of an e-mail or I-fax before sending it?
You can set for received documents to be printed on both sides of the paper. (See
"Two-Sided Printing," on p. 8-37.)
You can set for received documents to be forwarded to e-mail destinations, or receive
documents in memory and then send them to the desired destinations. (See
"Forwarding Settings," on p. 10-26, and Chapter 5, "Using/Arranging Documents Stored
in an Inbox," in the Mail Box Guide.)
You can set the machine not to print reports. (See "Specifying Report Settings," on
p. 11-3.)
When you are not using the machine, you may turn OFF the control panel power switch
on the control panel, but leave the main power switch turned ON. Documents that are
set with the Delayed Send setting are automatically sent from memory when the
specified time arrives.
You can specify the Maximum Data Size for Sending setting according to your needs. To
access this setting, press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Communications Settings] ➞ [E-mail/I-Fax Settings]. For e-mail, the send job is split up
into several e-mail messages before being sent so that the data size of each e-mail does
not exceed the set limit. You cannot send an I-fax if the data size exceeds the set limit.
Questions & Answers
I cannot tell if the document was successfully sent because the result in the Activity
Report shows '--'.
A
'--' is displayed when sending is successful, but it is not confirmed whether the e-mail or
I-fax that you sent was actually delivered or not. Contact the recipient to check whether
the document was received.
Troubleshooting
Q
12
Questions & Answers
12-27
Troubleshooting
12
12-28
Questions & Answers
Appendix
13
CHAPTER
This chapter provides the reports and lists of activity management, specifications, glossary,
and index.
Report and List Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Send Job List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-2
Send TX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3
Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5
Forwarding Conditions List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-7
Registered LDAP Server List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-8
Address Book List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-9
User's Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
13-1
Report and List Samples
Send Job List
You can view the list of Send jobs and their statuses. The Send Job List can be
printed from the System Monitor screen. (See "Printing the Send Job Status/Log,"
on p. 7-14.)
04/21/2003 MON 15:49
. 001
iR C3200
*********************
***
***
*********************
S ET TI ME
S T. TI ME
04/ 21 15: 49
22: 00
DESTINATION ADDRESS
D E ST I N A T I O N I D
tom@canon.com tom
01
starfish.organization.c f i l e s h a re
\\swan\share project
JOB NO.
0001
MODE
P G S.
TX
MAIL
TX
BOX
TX
FTP
TX
SM B
1
NOTE
• A list of fax jobs is also displayed if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed. (See
Chapter 14, "Appendix," in the Facsimile Guide.)
• The addresses used in the above report are fictitious.
• If a field exceeds its display capacity, only those characters that fit on the display are
printed.
■ SET TIME
The date and time that the send job was specified is printed in 24-hour notation.
■ ST. TIME
Appendix
The time (in 24-hour notation) at which the documents started to transmit are printed. The
Start Time is printed only for send jobs that have been set with the Delayed Send setting.
■ DESTINATION ADDRESS
The address of the recipient is printed.
13
■ DESTINATION ID
The name of the recipient is printed.
■ JOB NO.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for
sending, is printed.
13-2
Report and List Samples
■ MODE
The type and mode of transmission are printed.
Transmission type:
Send (TX)
Mode of transmission: FTP, SMB, IPX, User Inbox (BOX), I-Fax (I-FAX), E-mail (MAIL)
■ PGS.
The number of pages that were sent successfully to the remote party, is printed.
Send TX Report
The Send TX Report is a printed report that informs you of whether a send job has
been successfully delivered to its destination. A Send TX Report can be set to print
automatically after each job is sent, or only when there are transmission errors.
(See "Send TX Report," on p. 11-3.)
04/21/2003 MON 15:30
. 001
i R C32 00
*****************
*** TX REPORT ***
*****************
JOB NO.
0108
DEPT. I D
1234
S T. TI ME
0 4 /2 1 1 5 :3 0
PGS .
1
S END DOCUMENT NAME
TX/ RX I NCOMPLETE
-- - - -
TRANS ACTI ON OK
t om
tom @ca n on .com
fi l e s h a re
s ta rf i s h .org a n i z a ti on .com
project
\\s w a n \s h a re
NOTE
• The default settings are:
- TX Report:
For Error Only
- Error Copy Print (Black Only): On
• Even if you select [On], the contents of the sent document are not printed on the report if
any one of the following conditions are true.
- If an I-fax address is not included in the destination
- If the image on the first page of the scanned original is not in black-and-white when
sending to an e-mail address or file server
• A list of fax jobs is also displayed if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed. (See
Chapter 14, "Appendix," in the Facsimile Guide.)
• The addresses used in the above report are fictitious.
• If a field exceeds its display capacity, only those characters that fit on the display are
printed.
■ JOB NO.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for
sending, is printed.
Report and List Samples
13-3
Appendix
BOX 01
ERROR
13
■ DEPT. ID
If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed.
■ ST. TIME
The date and time (in 24-hour notation) at which the documents started to transmit are
printed. The Start Time is printed only for send jobs that have been set with the Delayed
Send setting.
■ PGS.
The number of pages that were sent successfully to the remote party, is printed.
■ SEND DOCUMENT NAME
The name given to the document when the send settings were specified, is printed.
■ TX/RX INCOMPLETE
If transmission has been interrupted, the name and address of the destination are printed.
■ TRANSACTION OK
If transmission has been completed successfully, the name and address of the destination
are printed.
■ ERROR
Appendix
If a sending error occurs, the name and address of the destination are printed.
13
13-4
Report and List Samples
Activity Report
This report is a list which enables you to check the results of all sending and
receiving transactions. An Activity Report can be printed either automatically or
manually.
An Activity Report is automatically printed when either the number of
communication results reaches 100, or a specified time is reached. The send and
receive logs can also be printed separately.
An Activity Report can be printed manually at any time from the System Monitor
screen. (See "Printing the Send Job Status/Log," on p. 7-14.)
04/21/2003 MON 15:30
. 001
iR C3200
********************************
*** A C T I V I T Y R E P O R T T X / R X ***
********************************
D E P T . I D : 511008
S T. TI ME
04/10 12:51
DESTINATION ADDRESS
D E ST I N A T I O N I D
172.20.56.5
MODE
JOB NO.
R E SU L T
P G S.
0104
TX
FTP
47 NG
14'10
0105
TX
BOX
1 OK
00'00
0106
TX
FTP
0 NG
00'01
0107
TX
MAIL
1 --
00'01
00'04
/tmp/img
04/10 15:03
04/10 15:03
01
starfish.organization Sh a re F ol d er
#755
share
04/10 15:03
04/10 15:03
john@canon.com j oh n
\\swan\share project
#802
0108
TX
SM B
0 NG
5213
RX
I-FAX
1 OK
00'01
0110
TX
FTP
1 OK
00'21
0111
TX
BOX
1 NG
00'01
0120
TX
FTP
0
\share_dir
04/10 15:04
04/10 15:05
bob@canon.com B ob
172.20.56.5
#802
/tmp/img
04/10 15:06
04/10 15:47
01
starfish.organization.com Sh a re F ol d er
#802
NOTE
• The default settings are:
- Auto Print:
On
- Daily Activity Report Time: Off
- Send/Receive Separate:
(Not selected)
• A list of fax jobs is also displayed if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed. (See
Chapter 14, "Appendix," in the Facsimile Guide.)
• The addresses used in the above report are fictitious.
• If a field exceeds its display capacity, only those characters that fit on the display are
printed.
■ DEPT. ID
If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed. Transmission logs are
listed according to Department ID.
Report and List Samples
13-5
Appendix
share/share_dir
13
■ ST. TIME
The date and time (in 24-hour notation) at which the documents started to transmit are
printed. An asterisk (*) indicates a job that has already been printed.
■ DESTINATION ADDRESS
The address of the recipient is printed.
• If the send job is sent to a file server (FTP, SMB, or IPX), the path name is printed on the
second line.
■ DESTINATION ID
The name of the recipient is printed.
■ JOB NO.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for
sending or receiving, is printed. Numbers between 0001 and 4999 are for sending, while
numbers between 5001 and 9999 are for receiving.
■ MODE
The type and mode of transmission are printed.
Transmission type:
Send (TX), Receive (RX)
Mode of transmission: FTP, SMB, IPX, User Inbox (BOX), I-Fax (I-FAX), E-mail (MAIL)
NOTE
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, FAX, G3, and ECM can also be displayed
in the MODE column. (See Chapter 14, "Appendix," in the Facsimile Guide.)
■ PGS.
The number of pages that were sent or received successfully, is printed.
■ RESULT
<OK>, <NG>, or <- -> and the transmission time are printed.
If the documents have been successfully received by the recipient, "OK" is printed.
Appendix
If a sending error occurs "NG" (No Good) is printed, and the error code is printed on the
second line.
If an e-mail or I-fax transmission to a file server or the specified destination has been
confirmed as successful, "- -" is printed (similar to the "return receipt" feature of sending
an e-mail message).
13
13-6
Report and List Samples
Forwarding Conditions List
You can print the contents of the forwarding settings that have been specified.
Manually print the Forwarding Conditions List whenever necessary. (See "Printing
Forwarding Settings," on p. 10-64.)
04/21/2003 MON 15:30
iR C3200
. 001
************************************
*** FORWARDING CONDITIONS LIST ***
************************************
CONDITION NAME
FORWARD W/O CONDITIONS (I-FAX RX)
ON/OFF
OFF
FORWARDING DESTINATION
FWDING DESTIN. TYPE
I-FAX
FWDING DESTIN. NAME
T om
SEND DOCUMENT NAME
TEST1
FILE FORMAT
TIFF
STORE/PRINT RECEIVED DOC.
OFF
FORWARDING DONE NOTICE
–
NOTICE ONLY FOR ERRORS
–
CONDITION NAME
tes t
ON/OFF
OFF
FORWARDING CONDITION
RECEIVE TYPE
I-FAX
TO
DISREGARDED
FROM
E QUA L S b ob @c a non. c om
SUBJECT
DISREGARDED
FORWARDING DESTINATION
FWDING DESTIN. TYPE
I-FAX
FWDING DESTIN. NAME
T om
SEND DOCUMENT NAME
TEST2
FILE FORMAT
TIFF
STORE/PRINT RECEIVED DOC.
OFF
FORWARDING TIME
E V E R YDA Y 0 0 : 0 0 - 1 0 : 0 0
FORWARDING DONE NOTICE
–
NOTICE ONLY FOR ERRORS
–
Appendix
NOTE
• For more information on specifying Forwarding Settings, see "Forwarding Settings," on
p. 10-26.
• The addresses used in the above report are fictitious.
13
Report and List Samples
13-7
Registered LDAP Server List
You can print the registered LDAP server settings. (See "Printing LDAP Server
Settings," on p. 10-83.)
04/21/2003 MON 15:30
iR C3200
. 001
****************************************
*** R E GI S TE R E D LDA P S E R V E R LI S T ***
****************************************
SERVER NAME
SERVER ADDRESS
LOCATION TO START SEARCH
USE SSL
PORT NUMBER
MAX. NO. OF ADDRESSES TO SEARCH
SEARCH TIMEOUT
LOGIN INFORMATION
USER
DISPLAY AUTHENT. DIALOG WHEN SEARCHING
SERVER LDAP VERSION AND CHARACTER CODE
abc
hostname.canon.com
"ou=ffm, o=mip"
Off
389
100
60 sec.
USE
abcdefg
Off
VER.3(UTF-8)
SERVER NAME
SERVER ADDRESS
LOCATION TO START SEARCH
USE SSL
PORT NUMBER
MAX. NO. OF ADDRESSES TO SEARCH
SEARCH TIMEOUT
LOGIN INFORMATION
SERVER LDAP VERSION AND CHARACTER CODE
def
177.22.32.64
"ou=ffm, o=mip"
Off
389
200
120 sec.
DO NOT USE
VER.3(UTF-8)
SERVER NAME
SERVER ADDRESS
LOCATION TO START SEARCH
USE SSL
PORT NUMBER
MAX. NO. OF ADDRESSES TO SEARCH
SEARCH TIMEOUT
LOGIN INFORMATION
USER
DOMAIN NAME
DISPLAY AUTHENT. DIALOG WHEN SEARCHING
SERVER LDAP VERSION AND CHARACTER CODE
ghi
hostname.canon.com
"DC=mip, DC=ffm, DC=canon, DC=com"
Off
389
100
180 sec.
USE (SECURITY AUTHENTICATION)
hijklm
ffm.canon.com
Off
VER.3(UTF-8)
Appendix
NOTE
For more information on specifying LDAP Server Settings, see "LDAP Server Settings,"
on p. 10-66.
13
13-8
Report and List Samples
Address Book List
You can print the contents of the Address Book (subaddress books 1 to 10 or
one-touch buttons). Manually print the list of the selected Address Book whenever
necessary. (See "Address Book List," on p. 11-9.)
04/21/2003 MON 15:30
iR C3200
. 001
*****************************
*** ADDRESS BOOK LIST (1) ***
*****************************
DESTINATION NAME
CLASS
file share
FTP
GROUP
tom
image server
GROUP
I-FAX
FTP
BOX
DESTINATION ADDRESS
starfish.organization.com
share
SMB
tom@canon.com
172.20.56.5
01
\\swan\share
bob
I-FAX
bob@canon.com
sales 4
SMB
\\swan\share
\sales_4
nick
MAIL
nick@canon.com
project
NOTE
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, fax numbers are also displayed in the
Destination Address Column. (See Chapter 14, "Appendix," in the Facsimile Guide.)
• The addresses used in the above report are fictitious.
■ DESTINATION NAME
The name of the specified destination is printed.
When printing the contents of a one-touch button, the number of the one-touch button is
printed on the first line.
■ CLASS
Appendix
The specified destination's class (transmission mode) is printed.
13
Report and List Samples
13-9
■ DESTINATION ADDRESS
• If the Class is 'FTP', 'SMB', or 'IPX' (file server):
Appendix
The host name is printed on the first line, and the folder path on the second line.
• If the Class is 'BOX':
The number of the User Inbox is printed.
• If the Class is 'I-FAX' or 'MAIL':
The I-fax address or e-mail address is printed.
• If the Class is 'GROUP':
The destinations stored in the group are printed on the second line and continues down
in a list. If a file server is stored in the group address, no additional information is printed
on the second line.
13
13-10
Report and List Samples
User's Data List
The User's Data List prints out the Send Settings made in Communications
Settings, Report Settings, and System Settings from the Additional Functions
screen. Manually print the User's Data List whenever necessary. (See "User's Data
List," on p. 11-11.)
04/21/2003 MON 15:30
iR C3200
. 001
*********************************************
*** US E R 'S D A TA LI S T (C o m m u n icat io n s ) ***
*********************************************
Unit Name
Erase Failed TX
JPEG Compression Ratio
Print Failed Forwarding Documents
Retry Times
Image Level for PDF (Compct)
Image Level for PDF (Compct)
Image Level in Text Mode
Default Screen for Send
TX Terminal ID
Gamma Value for Color Send Jobs
RX Settings
Two-sided Print
Select Cassette
Switch A
Switch B
Switch C
Switch D
Receive Reduction
Receive Reduction
Reduce %
Reduce Direction
Received Page Footer
2 ON 1 LOG
Report Settings
TX Report
Error Copy Print (Black Only)
Activity Report
Auto Print
Daily Activity Report Time
Send/Receive Separate
System Settings
Communications Settings
E-mail/I-Fax Settings
Maximum Data Size For Sending
Default Subject
Full Mode TX Timeout
Print MDN/DSN on Receipt
Always send notice for RX errors
Use Send Via Server
Memory RX Inbox Settings
Use I-Fax Memory Lock
Memory Lock Start Time
Memory Lock End Time
01: To k yo
02: Ne w Y o rk
03: Lo n do n
C an o n
On
No rm al
Of f
3 t im e s
No rm al
No rm al
Ne w A ddre s s
Ou t s ide
1. 8
Of f
On
On
On
On
On
Auto
90%
V e rt ical On ly
On
Of f
FOR E R R O R ONLY
On
On
Of f
Of f
Appendix
Communications Settings
TX Settings
Sender's Names (TTI)
3 MB
A t t ach e d I m age
24 H o u rs
Of f
On
Of f
13
On
Of f
Of f
Report and List Samples
13-11
Glossary
A
ASCII code
ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) is a set of standardized
codes used to represent letters, numbers, a few symbols, and control characters. A
seven digit (or seven bit) binary number can represent one of 128 distinct codes.
C
Confidential Fax Inbox
To receive a confidential document, first create a Confidential Fax Inbox by registering
your subaddress and RX Password. The password is used to print out confidential
documents that you have stored in the memory. Numbers of up to 20 digits, including
space, asterisk (*), and pound sign (#), can be used for the RX Password. The
machine prints out a Confidential RX Report when you receive a confidential
document in your Confidential Fax Inbox.
D
DNS server
Domain Name System server. A server which maintains a database that translates
the domain names of Internet servers, such as www.w3.org, into Internet Protocol
(IP) addresses, such as "18.176.0.26". This enables clients to connect to a server
with a host name rather than a numeric IP address.
dpi
Appendix
Dots per inch. A measure of screen and printer resolution that is expressed as the
number of dots that a device can print or display per linear inch.
F
13
File formats
File formats used to save image data. This machine supports five different file
formats, TIFF, MTIFF, JPG, PDF, and PDF (Compct).
13-12
Glossary
File server
A personal computer or workstation to which two or more users on client personal
computers can gain access via a local area network (LAN) in order to share and use
its hard disk drive.
FTP
File Transfer Protocol. A client-server protocol enabling a user to transfer files on one
computer to and from another computer over a TCP/IP network. The File Transfer
Protocol also governs the client program with which the user transfers files.
I
I-fax
I-fax enable you to transmit and receive a scanned original document converted to
TIFF (Tag Image File Format) image data or PDF (Portable Document Format) as an
attached of an e-mail to/from any facsimile with I-fax compatibility or personal
computer with e-mail functionally thorough the Internet.
Internet Protocol (IP)
The underlying set of networking rules that describes how data is transmitted across
the Internet. Internet Protocol allows data from one computer to be split into packets
to be sent to another computer with a specific IP address.
IP address
Internet Protocol address. A 32-bit numeric address used by IP (internet protocol) to
specify a computer on the Internet. The IP address is usually written as four numbers
separated by periods. An example is 128.121.4.5.
J
Joint Photographic Coding Experts Group. A file format designed for compressing
color or grayscale images used for Homepages and so forth. It is standardized by
CCITT (Comite Consultatif International Telegraphique et Telephonique) and ISO
(International Organization for Standardization) as a compression mechanism for still
images.
L
Appendix
JPEG
13
LDAP
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. A software protocol that enables location of
organizations, individuals, and other resources, such as files and printers in a
network, whether on the public Internet or on a corporate intranet.
Glossary
13-13
M
Memory Lock
Usually, a document is printed as soon as it is received; but with Memory Lock, all
documents received are kept in memory until you enter a password to print them. This
enables you to attend to them at your own leisure, and prevents printed documents
from piling up on the output tray.
Memory RX Inbox
A location in the memory where you can store scanned or received documents that
are to be printed or transmitted to other destinations. The Memory RX Inbox provides
features for you to set up an ITU-T subaddress and password. From the Memory RX
Inbox, you can perform confidential sending and relay sending to any other fax units
as long as they also support ITU-T standard subaddress and password transactions.
MTIFF
Multi-page TIFF. A variant of TIFF which can hold multiple images, compared to a
TIFF file which can hold only a single image.
N
NetBEUI
NetBIOS Enhanced User Interface. NetBEUI is a network protocol originally designed
by IBM and later extended by Microsoft and Novell. In a small network, NetBEUI is
more efficient than other protocols, such as TCP/IP. It is supported natively by IBM
operating systems and Microsoft Windows to provide services such as file sharing
and printing.
NetWare
Appendix
Novell NetWare. Novell Inc.'s client-server network operating system for the IBM PC.
NetWare uses the IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, or TCP/IP network protocols. Netware
supports MS-DOS, Microsoft Windows, OS/2, and Macintosh clients. NetWare for
Unix gives users access to Unix hosts.
O
OS/2
A family of multitasking operating systems developed by IBM for Intel x86-based
computers. OS/2 provides a graphic user interface similar to Windows as well as a
command line interface similar to DOS. Add-ons to OS/2 enable it to run DOS and
Windows applications.
13
13-14
Glossary
P
PDF
Portable Document Format. A file format run by Adobe Systems' Acrobat software
which is restricted neither by device nor resolution. PDF displays documents in a way
that is independent of the original application software, hardware, and operating
system used to create those documents. A PDF document can contain any
combination of text, graphics, and images.
PDF (Compct)
One of the file formats available with this machine. The text and image portions of an
original are processed separately to achieve a high level of compression without
compromising the quality of texts. The resulting file or data size is smaller than that
achieved by conventional PDF, and is therefore recommended for jobs that are to be
sent over the network.
Protocol
A set of rules that govern the transmission of data across a network. Examples of
protocols are FTP, DHCP, BOOTP, RARP, IPP, TCP/IP, and LDAP.
R
RX Password
The RX Password is needed to send or receive documents to and from a fax machine
that uses ITU-T standard subaddresses and RX passwords. If the passwords on both
ends do not match, the fax is not transmitted. Numbers of up to 20 digits, including
space, asterisk (*), and pound sign (#), can be used for the RX Password.
S
Your personal or organization name. The sender's name, fax number, date, and time
sent are printed on each page that you send. You can register up to 99 sender names,
that are selected using the TTI selector, before sending.
Subaddress
Subaddress is the Global telecommunications standard provided by ITU-T
(International Telecommunication Union – Telecommunication Standardization
Sector). As long as the remote party's machine supports the same standards,
confidential or relayed communications are possible by attaching a subaddress and a
password in advance.
Glossary
13-15
Appendix
Sender's Name
13
Subaddress Books
The main Address Book is subdivided into ten smaller Address Books, which are
considered Subaddress Books.
SMB
Server Message Block. A protocol that provides file and printer sharing over a
network for Windows computers.
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. A TCP/IP Protocol for sending messages from one
computer to another on a network.
T
TIFF
Tag Image File Format. A file format that saves images as high-density bitmaps and is
suitable for large amounts of image data. The information field (tag) at the start of
each image data record indicates the type of data represented.
TTI
Appendix
Transmit Terminal Identification. Also called the TX Terminal ID. The TTI is the name
of a person or an organization and the facsimile number of the machine that sends a
document. In addition to a unit name that you register for the machine, you can create
up to 99 sender names that can be selected and used in place of the unit name when
you send a facsimile transmission.
13
13-16
Glossary
Index
C
2 On 1 Log, 8-48
Canceling a job
Using the Stop key, 1-43
Using the System Monitor screen, 1-44
Using the touch panel display, 1-42
Color Mode drop-down list, 1-8
Color modes
Automatic color selection (Full Color/
Black-and-White), 3-26
Automatic color selection (Full Color/
Grayscale), 3-24
Black-and-white, 3-31
Changing, 3-24
Full color, 3-28
Grayscale, 3-30
Communications Settings table, 8-2
Compression
Compression ratio for color send jobs (JPEG),
8-6
Setting the PDF compression priority, 8-23
Contrast
Adjusting, 4-24
High, 4-24
Low, 4-24
Copyrights, xv
A
Abbreviations used in this manual, xiii
Access number management, 10-24
Activity Report, 11-5, 13-5
Address Book
About the Address Book, 9-3
Access number management, 10-24
Address Book List sample, 13-9
Address Book password, 10-22
Editing addresses, 9-50
Erasing addresses, 9-54
Naming an address book, 9-58
Printing the Address Book, 11-9
Storing new addresses, 9-5
Address Book key, 1-6
Address Book Settings table, 9-2
Automatic document deletion, 8-4
B
Before using this machine
Registering sender names, 1-16
Registering the Sending Record, 1-10
Registering the unit's name, 1-19
Setting the date and time, 1-11
Setting the display language, 1-11
Things to do, 1-10
Binding erase, 4-5, 4-13
Book frame erase, 4-5, 4-10
Appendix
Numerics
D
Date and time, setting, 1-11
Default Send screen, 8-26
Destinations, checking/changing, 2-49
Destinations, erasing, 2-52
Destinations, specifying
About specifying destinations, 2-2
Using a server, 2-38
Using the Address Book, 2-2
Using the Favorites Buttons, 2-36
Index
13
13-17
Using the New Address tab, 2-5
Using the One-touch Buttons, 2-34
Details key, 1-6
Different size originals, 4-17
Disclaimers, xv
Display language, setting, 1-11
Displays used in this manual, xii
Document Size Select key, 1-8
Turning the forwarding function ON/OFF, 10-62
Frame erase
About frame erase, 4-5
Binding erase, 4-5, 4-13
Book frame erase, 4-5, 4-10
Original frame erase, 4-5, 4-6
G
E
Gamma value, setting, 8-33
Glossary, 13-12
E-mail/I-Fax settings
Always send notice for RX errors, 10-4
Default subject, 10-4
Full mode TX timeout, 10-4
Maximum data size for sending, 10-4
Print MDN/DSN on receipt, 10-4
Use send via server, 10-4
Erase key, 1-6
Error messages, 4-27, 12-8
Exposure key, 1-9
Appendix
Favorites Buttons
About Favorites Buttons, 2-36, 8-15
Erasing, 8-20
Naming, 8-18
Registering, 8-15
Favorites Buttons key, 1-7
Feeder, 1-35, 1-40
File Format drop-down list, 1-7
Flow of sending operations, 1-22
Footer information, printing, 8-46
Forwarding Conditions List sample, 13-7
Forwarding errors, handling, 8-8
Forwarding settings
About forwarding settings, 10-26
Checking/Changing, 10-60
Erasing, 10-63
Forwarding without conditions, 10-49
Printing, 10-64
Storing, 10-26
13-18
I-Fax settings, 10-4
Illustrations used in this manual, xiii
Image quality adjustment
About image quality adjustment, 4-27
Prevent bleeding, 4-27, 4-31
J
F
13
I
Index
Job build, 4-19
Job done notice, 5-37
Job Done Notice key, 1-7
Job recall, 5-41
JPEG compression ratio, 8-6
K
Keys used in this manual, xi
L
LDAP server settings
About LDAP server settings, 10-66
Changing an LDAP server setting, 10-80
Deleting an LDAP server, 10-82
Registering an LDAP server, 10-66
Legal notices
Copyrights, xv
Disclaimers, xv
Trademarks, xiv
Text mode, 3-19
Text/Photo mode, 3-19
Original Type drop-down list, 1-9
Overview, 1-5
M
P
Memory RX Inbox settings
About Memory RX Inbox settings, 10-10
Memory lock end time, 10-18
Memory lock start time, 10-14
Setting a password, 10-10
Settings for storing received I-Fax, 10-13
Paper drawer selection, 8-39
Paper sizes, 6-23
Photo mode, 3-19
Placing originals
About placing originals, 1-35
Feeder, 1-35, 1-40
Orientation, 1-36
Platen glass, 1-35, 1-37
Platen glass, 1-35, 1-37
Prevent bleeding, 4-31
Preview key, 1-7
Previewing originals, 5-34
New Address key, 1-8
New addresses, specifying
E-mail address, 2-6
File server address, 2-13
User Inbox, 2-32
New addresses, storing
Addresses obtained via a server, 9-34
E-mail addresses, 9-5
File server addresses, 9-19
Group addresses, 9-25
I-Fax addresses, 9-10
O
One-touch Buttons
About One-touch Buttons, 2-34
Erasing, 9-87
Storing/Editing, 9-60
One-touch Buttons key, 1-8
Orientation
Horizontal placement, 1-36
Vertical placement, 1-36
Original frame erase, 4-5, 4-6
Original type
Photo mode, 3-19
Selecting, 3-19
Q
Q&A, 12-25
R
Recall key, 1-7
Receive jobs
Checking receive job details, 7-17
Checking the arrival of an I-Fax, 7-21
Checking the status of forwarded jobs, 7-22
Checking/Changing the status of receive jobs,
7-17
Printing the receive job log, 7-19
Receiving documents
About receiving documents, 6-2
Erasing received documents, 6-19
Forwarding received documents, 6-18
Reducing a received document, 8-42
Setting the Memory Lock mode, 6-4
What happens when documents are received,
6-3
Index
13-19
Appendix
N
13
Appendix
13
Remove background, 4-27
Report settings
Activity Report, 11-5
Send TX Report, 11-3
Specifying, 11-3
Report Settings table, 11-2
Resolution, 3-15
Resolution drop-down list, 1-8
Retry times, 8-10
Sending an I-Fax, 5-14
Sending record, registering, 1-10
Sharpness, 4-24
Special Features key, 1-9
Standard send settings, 8-12
Store/Erase key, 1-9
Symbols used in this manual, xi
System Monitor key, 1-9
System Settings table, 10-2
S
T
Samples
Activity Report, 13-5
Address Book List, 13-9
Forwarding Conditions List, 13-7
Send Job List, 13-2
Send TX Report, 13-3
User's Data List, 13-11
Scan exposure
Automatic exposure adjustment, 3-22
Manual exposure adjustment, 3-17
Scan mode drop-down list, 1-6, 1-8
Scan mode, selecting, 3-2
Scan settings
Document size, 3-7
Original type, 3-17
Resolution, 3-15
Scan exposure, 3-17
Two-sided originals, 3-5
Send Job List sample, 13-2
Send jobs
Changing the destination, 7-7
Checking send job details, 7-2
Checking/Changing the status of send jobs, 7-2
Printing the send job status/log, 7-14
Resending a job, 7-11
Send Settings key, 1-7
Send TX Report, 11-3, 13-3
Sender names, registering, 1-16
Sending methods
Delaying a send job, 5-31
Sending a job to a file server, 5-23
Sending a job to a User Inbox, 5-28
Sending an e-mail message, 5-2
Text mode, 3-19
Text/Photo mode, 3-19
Trademarks, xiv
Troubleshooting
Error messages, 12-8
Other situations, 12-7
Q&A, 12-25
Receiving documents, 12-5
Sending documents, 12-2
Two-page separation, 4-2
Two-sided Original key, 1-7
Two-sided printing, 8-37
TX settings, initializing, 8-35
TX Terminal ID, printing, 8-28
13-20
Index
U
Unit name, registering, 1-19
User Preset keys
About User Preset keys, 4-34
Erasing scan settings, 4-40
Naming a User Preset key, 4-38
Storing scan settings, 4-34
User's data
Printing, 11-11
User's Data List sample, 13-11